Microsoft GP 2013 Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) System Setup Guide

Assigning a setup task or category to a user

Build

We refer to the process of installing and setting up Microsoft Dynamics GP as the

“build” process. In addition to installing Microsoft Dynamics GP or Microsoft SQL

Server on one or more servers, it includes setting up process servers and workstations. This process includes the following tasks:

• Installing Microsoft Dynamics GP

• Entering a chart of accounts

• Importing existing data

• Entering additional customer, vendor, employee, and item records

• Entering sales tax details and schedules

• Entering beginning balances

• Printing reports of beginning balances and master records

• Backing up your beginning data

The Setup Checklist window lists tasks in the order in which they should be completed. Additional documentation for each task is available in the Setup Guide that is displayed next to the Setup Checklist window. Depending on the size of your organization, a number of people might be involved in completing these tasks.

Operate

The operate phase involves entering and posting transactions, maintaining master records, such as customer records or item records, printing reports, issuing checks, applying payments to invoices, and recognizing revenue. Making regular backups and updating virus protection should be one of the routines you follow in this phase.

Maintain

Using software effectively involves installing updates and upgrades. In addition, there are certain tasks that should be completed at the end of accounting periods and fiscal and calendar years. Managers, network administrators and IT professionals will be more involved in completing tasks in this phase than in the operate phase.

8 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 2: Setting up Microsoft Dynamics GP

The following information explains how you can use the Setup Checklist window to set up Microsoft Dynamics GP. The Setup Checklist window is designed to help make the setup process easier. You can use it to assign setup tasks to other Microsoft

Dynamics GP users and open setup windows.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Setup Checklist

•

Setup checklist views

•

Setup Guide

•

•

Completing a setup task

•

Setting system preferences

Setup Checklist

Use the Setup Checklist window (Administration >> Setup >> Setup Checklist) to set up Microsoft Dynamics GP. The window contains a tree view that organizes setup tasks into System, Company, Field Service, Financial, Posting, Purchasing,

Inventory, Human Resources, Payroll, and Sales categories. It also can provide tasks for additional components. You can open the Setup Checklist window

Each category in the tree view contains setup tasks that are displayed when you expand the category. A setup task is an object in the tree view that is associated with a setup window. You can select a setup task and choose Open to display the setup window for that setup task. For example, if you select Account Format and then choose Open, the Account Format Setup window will open, where you can set up an account format for your chart of accounts.

If a setup task is assigned to one or more users, you can expand that task to view who it is assigned to. The setup tasks are listed in a recommended order for setting up Microsoft Dynamics GP.

You can use the Expand All and Collapse All buttons at the top of the Setup

Checklist window to expand or collapse all of the objects in the window tree view.

An icon indicates the status of each category, setup task, or task assignment. A setup task that has been assigned to one or more users is complete after each of those users has selected the Complete option in the Assignment window.

You only can modify the status of a setup task if it has not been assigned to a user.

However, if you are a system administrator and the setup task is assigned to you, or you assigned the setup task to another user, you can modify the status of the task assignment.

To modify the status of a setup task or task assignment, you can select it and then select a status in the Status field in the Setup Checklist window.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 9

P A R T 1

Refer to the following table for more information about the icons and statuses displayed in the Setup Checklist window.

Icon Status Description

Recommended and incomplete

Optional and incomplete

Indicates that the setup task is recommended, but has not been completed and has not been assigned to a user.

Indicates that the setup task is optional, but has not been completed or assigned to a user.

Recommended, assigned to a user, and incomplete

Indicates that the setup task is recommended and is assigned to a user, but has not been completed.

Optional, assigned to a user, and incomplete

Completed

Indicates that the setup task is optional and is assigned to a user, but has not been completed.

Indicates that the setup task has been completed.

Not used

In Progress

Indicates that the setup task will not be completed.

Indicates that a user has completed part of the setup task.

Setup checklist views

You can mark an option in the Setup Checklist window to specify which setup tasks to display in the window tree view. Refer to the following table for a description of the options that are available.

Option

My tasks

My incomplete tasks

All tasks

All incomplete tasks

All complete tasks

Optional setup tasks

Unregistered modules

Description

Select this option to display only the setup tasks that are assigned to you or were assigned by you.

Select this option to display only the setup tasks that are assigned to you or were assigned to you, but are incomplete.

Select this option to display all of the setup tasks in the Setup

Checklist window.

Select this option to display all of the setup tasks that are incomplete.

Select this option to display all of the setup tasks that are complete.

Select this option to include optional setup tasks in the Setup

Checklist tree view. Optional setup tasks are those that aren’t required for the system to be set up.

Select this option to include setup tasks for unregistered modules in the Setup Checklist tree view.

10 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 S E T T I N G U P M I C R O S O F T D Y N A M I C S G P

Setup Guide

The Setup Guide is displayed next to the Setup Checklist window to assist you in setting up Microsoft Dynamics GP. When you select a setup task in the Setup

Checklist window tree view, information for that task will be displayed in the Setup

Guide. For example, if you select User Preferences in the window tree view, information about using the User Preferences window will be displayed in the

Setup Guide.

Assigning a setup task or category to a user

You can assign a setup task or category to another user. When you assign a category to a user, an assignment will be created for each setup task in that category for the user that you assigned the category to. After the start date for the task, a reminder will be created for users who have incomplete setup tasks assigned to them.

Reminders are displayed in the Reminders window. See the System User’s Guide

(Help >> Contents >> select Using the System) for more information about reminders.

Use the Setup Checklist window to assign a setup task or a category to a user.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 11

P A R T 1

Workflow options in Microsoft Dynamics GP

To assign a setup task or category to a user:

Open the Setup Checklist window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Setup Checklist)

Select the setup task or category to assign.

You cannot reassign an existing task assignment. To assign a setup task to multiple users, you must create a task assignment for each user.

Choose Assign to open the Assignment window.

Select the user to assign the task to.

Enter or select a due date and a start date for this task.

If you have already completed part of the setup task, select In Progress in the

Status field list and choose OK. If this is a new assignment, choose OK to save your changes and close the Assignment window.

Completing a setup task

Each setup task is associated with a window that you must use to set up Microsoft

Dynamics GP. Use the Setup Checklist window to complete a setup task.

To complete a setup task:

Open the Setup Checklist window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Setup Checklist)

Select the setup task to complete. For this example, select User Preferences.

12 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 S E T T I N G U P M I C R O S O F T D Y N A M I C S G P

Choose Open. The User Preferences window will be displayed.

Modify your user preferences.

Choose OK to save your changes and close the window. The Setup Checklist

Status window will be displayed.

Select a status for the User Preferences window, then choose OK to return to the

Setup Checklist window.

Setting system preferences

In the System Preferences window, you can set home page defaults, enable the option for users to automatically log in to Microsoft Dynamics GP, and specify the location of your Microsoft SharePoint.

To set system preferences:

Open the System Preferences window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> System Preferences)

Enter the URL for your SharePoint server so that you can use the search box in

Microsoft Dynamics GP.

Select MAPI or Exchange as your email server type.

If you select Exchange, you must be using Exchange 2007 Service Pack 1 or greater with Exchange Web Services. The Autodiscover service must be enabled to connect to the Exchange server.

You can use MAPI or Exchange as the server type for email in the Microsoft Dynamics

GP desktop client. You can only use Exchange as the server type for email in the

Microsoft Dynamics GP Web Client.

Mark the Protect .docx attachments with a password option to send Word documents in email with password protection. With this option marked, a password must be entered before the recipient of the document can edit the document.

You can select to automatically generate the password for the documents or assign a password yourself. You are not given the password when you automatically generate the password.

Mark the To Do: Reminders if you want to load the home page content area by default for new users.

Mark Enable Remember User to have the Remember user and password option available in the Welcome to Microsoft Dynamics GP window for each user. If the user marks the Remember user and password option in the Welcome to

Microsoft Dynamics GP window, the user is automatically logged in to

Microsoft Dynamics GP the next time he or she starts Microsoft Dynamics GP.

You can use the Enable Remember User feature in the Microsoft Dynamics GP desktop client. This feature is not available for the Microsoft Dynamics GP Web Client.

Choose OK.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 13

14 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 3: Managing workflow

This information introduces features used to manage the progression of tasks that are completed in the course of doing business. You can use workflow features to help automate business processes, such as moving a sales quote to an order to a fulfilled invoice. You also can impose restrictions that force one or more people to approve actions. For example, you might want to have multiple levels of approval for purchases beyond a certain amount.

This information is divided into the following sections.

•

Workflow overview

•

•

Choosing the right workflow management option for your business

•

Microsoft Dynamics GP workflow terms

•

Workflow for SharePoint activation and basic setup

Workflow overview

Workflow refers to the series of ordered tasks that make up a more complex business process. For example, purchasing an item for your business can be a process that involves some or all of the following steps.

• Creating a requisition

• Approving the requisition

• Converting the requisition to a purchase order

• Approving the purchase order

• Placing the order with a vendor

• Receiving items against the purchase order when the order is fulfilled

Of course, the purchase will eventually have to be paid for, but selecting the specific transactions or vendors to pay, deciding when to pay them, and approving cash disbursements can involve one or more separate processes that are completed by other employees. As organizations become larger, the volume of transactions increases, and managing them becomes more complex. The term “workflow” can therefore refer to multiple, related things.

• Workflow is the sequence of actions that leads to the completion of a business task. The sequence is carried out according to a set of rules or policies.

• Workflow is the automation of a process that requires a number of discrete tasks to be completed.

• Workflow is the process of approving one or more individual steps that make up a more complex task.

Microsoft Dynamics GP includes a number of features that can help automate the completion of complex business tasks to help you manage large transaction volumes. However, you also can build checks or restrictions in business processes to help ensure consistency and compliance with company policies and legal requirements.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 15

P A R T 1

See Chapter 7, “Field level security.”

Workflow options in Microsoft Dynamics GP

Some of the following options can be used together; others are mutually exclusive.

Workflow option Business uses For more information

Batch approvals

Field level security

Purchase Order Enhancements

(approvals)

Use the approvals functions in the Purchase Order

Enhancements module to require approvals for purchasing tasks. Purchase orders that aren’t approved can’t be printed, received, or invoiced against.

See the “Purchase order approvals” chapter in the

Purchase Order Enhancements documentation.

Sales fulfillment Use the sales fulfillment function in Sales Order

Processing to increase the efficiency of moving sales quotes to orders, and then to fulfilled invoices. You can use the sales fulfillment function if you have high-volume sales, but don’t need extensive review processes to monitor and manage order fulfillment.

You still can bring some controls to this process, and increase those controls as needed by using field level security or electronic signatures with the sales fulfillment processes.

See “Sales fulfillment setup” in the Sales Order Processing documentation.

Workflow

Use this option to force the review and approval of batches before posting in

General Ledger. You can’t use the Workflow feature while requiring batch approvals in a company.

See the Batch verification and approval topic in the

“Transactions and Batches” chapter in the System User’s

Guide (Help >> Contents >>

Select Using The System).

Use field level security to restrict access to specific windows or fields. If customers seldom exceed credit limits, you might restrict the ability to override credit limits using field level security.

Workflow for SharePoint

Use the Workflow feature to set up comprehensive approvals for purchase orders, purchase requisitions, Payroll timecards, and Project timesheets.

See Part 5, Workflow setup

for information about designing approval structures and setting up required workflow components.

Use the Workflow feature to set up comprehensive approvals for sales, purchasing, master records, and batch approvals in General

Ledger, Receivables

Management, and Payables

Management.

See the Workflow

Administrator’s Guide for information about designing approval structures and setting up required workflow components.

16 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 M A N A G I N G W O R K F L O W

Choosing the right workflow management option for your business

When choosing a workflow method for your business, here are some items to consider.

• Are you more concerned with streamlining the fulfillment of orders, or with implementing a formal approval process for vendor records, employee records, purchases, quotes, credit overrides, and batches?

• Does your business require comprehensive, consistent control over the purchasing process, or does it require more flexible checks and restrictions throughout many of your processes? Or do you need both? The Workflow feature provides comprehensive, consistent control over the purchasing and batch posting processes. Field level security and electronic signatures are very flexible throughout Microsoft Dynamics GP, and can be used while you’re also using Workflow.

• If your organization requires an approval process for purchases, but you also want to minimize the administration and infrastructure investment, the approvals feature in Purchase Order Enhancements can provide an approval process that integrates with the encumbrances feature of Not for Profit

Accounting. Purchase Order Enhancements and Workflow must be used separately.

Microsoft Dynamics GP workflow terms

The following terms are used in the content that describes how to set up and use

Workflow.

Dynamics Security Service

A service used for managing user records and access privileges to multiple Microsoft Dynamics GP features and other integrating products. This term applies to Workflow for SharePoint.

Workflow (feature)

The name used for the functionality that manages the procession of documents from one task to another, and specifies approvers who can monitor tasks and allow documents to move to the next task in the process.

Workflow (approval process)

A formal approval process set up using the

Workflow feature. For example, you can create a purchase order approval workflow to manage the process of approving purchase orders of various quantities and currency amounts.

Workflow alert

A message displayed when a task defined in a workflow requires action from someone designated as an approver. This term applies to

Workflow for SharePoint.

Workflow status

A label assigned to documents at various points in the approval process. Document statuses include not submitted, pending user action, and completed. Refer to the System User’s Guide for information about specific workflow statuses.

If you are using Workflow for SharePoint, a Workflow status is a label assigned to documents or batches at various points in the approval process. Document statuses

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 17

P A R T 1

Microsoft Dynamics GP security

include submitted, pending, and approved. Refer to the Workflow Administrator’s

Guide for information about specific workflow statuses.

Workflow task

A task that requires action from an approver, based on rules defined in a workflow process.

Workflow for SharePoint activation and basic setup

Workflow must be set up in SharePoint Server 2010 or Windows SharePoint

Foundation, before you can set up workflow for Microsoft Dynamics GP. Refer to the Workflow Administrator’s Guide for more information.

Before you can start using Workflow in Microsoft Dynamics GP, you need to activate Workflow for your company in the Workflow Setup window. You also should add or review workflows using the Workflow List page. Refer to the

Workflow Administrator’s Guide for more information.

You must install Web Services for Microsoft Dynamics GP for each company that uses

Workflow. For more information, contact your system administrator.

To activate Workflow:

Open the Workflow Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Workflow Setup)

Mark the Activate Workflow for <company name> option to activate Workflow for the company that you are currently logged in to.

In the Microsoft Dynamics Workflow location field, enter the URL of your

Workflow Web service. For example: http://<ServerName>:82/WorkflowService.asmx

In the SharePoint location field, enter the URL of your Workflow SharePoint

Web site. For example: http://<ServerName>/sites/dynamicsgpworkflow

Click OK to save your changes and close the window.

To set up new workflows:

Open the Workflow Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Workflow Setup)

Choose Workflow Administration to display the Workflow List page in your

Web browser.

Use this page to set up new workflows. Refer to the Workflow Administrator’s

Guide for more information.

When you are finished, close the Workflow List page and close the Workflow

Setup window.

18 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 4: Security considerations

Use this information to help maintain the security of your Microsoft Dynamics GP data. Security considerations can include the following areas:

• Restricting physical access to the computers used to run Microsoft Dynamics

GP and store business data.

• Installing and maintaining software that detects and removes viruses, or that prevents unauthorized access to servers, workstations, and databases.

• Setting user access to Microsoft Dynamics GP windows and fields using field level security and the Microsoft Dynamics GP User Security Setup window.

• Backing up and restoring data on a recurring schedule.

Additional security considerations apply to business practices, such as your company’s policies for accepting personal checks, extending credit, or approving purchases, and for maintaining the privacy of data from customers, vendors and employees. These policy considerations are not addressed in this documentation.

Security information is divided into the following sections:

•

Physical security

•

Network security

•

Client security

•

•

Virus protection

Physical security

Physically securing computers is an effective way of preventing unauthorized access to applications and data. For example, if a hard disk drive is stolen, eventually the data on that drive will be stolen, also. The following practices can help maintain the physical security of your data.

• For larger businesses with dedicated IT departments, ensure that server rooms and places where software and backups are stored are locked.

• Keep unauthorized users away from the power and reset switches on the server.

• Consider removing any removable storage devices, including CD burners, from client workstations.

• Ensure that security alarms are installed, regardless of how sensitive the data is.

• Ensure that backups of critical data are stored off-site and that software is stored in fireproof and waterproof containers when not in use.

Network security

Servers are protected with their own operating system gatekeepers, but it is important that the network also is secure from attacks. The following information will help you to determine the type of security that you should have for your network.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 19

P A R T 1

Setting system security

Firewalls

Because the design and deployment of an IP inter–networking environment requires balancing private and public network concerns, the firewall is extremely important to safeguard network integrity. The following list of firewalls will help you to choose the firewall that is right for your network.

Firewall type

IP Packet Filtering

Application Gateways

Circuit Gateways

Proxy Servers

Description

It offers weak security, is cumbersome to manage, and is easily compromised.

These are used when the actual content of an application is of greatest concern. They are more secure than IP packet filtering, but are application–specific and, therefore, don’t adapt easily to changes in technology.

These are tunnels built through a firewall connecting specific processes or systems on one side with specific processes or systems on the other. Circuit gateways are best used in situations where the person using an application is potentially a greater risk than the information carried by the application. The circuit gateway differs from IP packet filtering in its ability to connect to an out-of-band application scheme that can add additional information.

These are security tools, which include firewall and application gateway functionality, that manage Internet traffic to and from a

Local Area Network (LAN). A proxy server can improve performance by caching and directly supplying frequently requested data, such as a popular Web page. It can also filter and discard requests that the owner does not consider appropriate, such as requests for unauthorized access to proprietary files.

Wireless networks

By default, wireless networks are typically configured to allow eavesdropping on the wireless signals. They can be vulnerable to a malicious outsider gaining access because of the default settings on some wireless hardware, the accessibility of wireless networks, and present encryption methods. There are configuration options and tools that can protect against eavesdropping, but they do nothing to protect the computers from hackers and viruses that enter through an Internet connection. Therefore, it is extremely important to include a firewall to protect the computers from unwanted intruders on the Internet.

For more information, go to http://www.microsoft.com/security/default.mspx

Client security

The following security best practices can help increase the security of the computing environment.

• Use the latest operating systems with the most up-to-date security features.

Also, operating system editions that are for business purposes typically have more security features.

• Use the Windows Update site to get the latest updates available for your computer’s operating system, software and hardware.

20 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 4 S E C U R I T Y C O N S I D E R A T I O N S

• Use the Microsoft Office Update site to help keep your Office products up-todate. Office product updates are created by Microsoft to bring you the highest levels of security, stability, and critical functionality available. ( http:// office.microsoft.com/en-us/officeupdate/default.aspx

)

Microsoft Dynamics GP security

The following security best practices can help increase the security of your

Microsoft Dynamics GP environment.

• Security settings will not be enforced unless the Security option in the Company

Setup window (Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company) is marked.

• The default security settings in Microsoft Dynamics GP allow all users access to only the windows and forms in Microsoft Dynamics GP that are needed to log in to the application. After setting up new user records, you should set access to companies and set up security for new users.

• Each time you install a new component in Microsoft Dynamics GP, such as

Human Resources, you must set up security for that component. For example, if you have been using Microsoft Dynamics GP for a year and you just installed

Human Resources, you will need to set up access to Human Resources before anyone can use it.

• Encourage users to use strong passwords for their Microsoft Dynamics GP user account. The easiest way to create a strong password that you will not have to write down is to come up with a passphrase, that is, a sentence that you can remember. Passwords also are considered strong if they have a combination of upper and lower case letters, numbers, and special characters. For example,

M$8ni3y0tmd@ is a strong password.

• We recommend that you do not leave the system password blank. For more information, refer to

on page 34.

Virus protection

These are the four main types of viruses that infect computer systems.

Boot-Sector viruses

These viruses scan the boot sector of the hard disk before loading the operating system or any other start–up files when a computer is started.

A boot-sector virus is designed to replace the information in the boot sectors of the hard disk with its own code.

File-Infecting viruses

The most common type of virus, a file-infecting virus, attaches itself to an executable program file by adding its own code to the executable file. Files infected by this type of virus usually have a .com, .exe, or .sys file name extension.

Trojan horse programs

This is not really a virus. The key distinction between a virus and a Trojan horse program is that a Trojan horse program does not replicate itself; it only destroys information on the hard disk. A Trojan horse program disguises itself as a legitimate program, such as a game or utility. When it’s run, though, it can destroy or scramble data.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 21

P A R T 1

Chapter 5, “User records,”

Macro viruses

This type of computer virus is stored in a macro within a file, template, or add-in. The spread of a macro virus can be prevented. Here are some tips to avoid infection.

• Install a virus protection solution that scans incoming messages from the

Internet for viruses before the messages pass the router to ensure that messages are scanned for known viruses.

• Verify accuracy of documents. Documents should not be opened unless they are from someone that you know is trustworthy.

• Talk to the person who created the document. If the you are not sure whether the document is safe, you should contact the person who created the document.

• Use the Microsoft Office macro virus protection. In Office, the applications alert the user if a document contains macros. This gives the user the option to run the macros when the document is opened.

• Use virus-scanning software to detect and remove macro viruses from documents. We recommend the use of antivirus software that is certified by the

International Computer Security Association (ICSA).

• Set the macro security level of Microsoft Office files to High or Medium and use a digital signature, which is an electronic, encryption-based, secure stamp of authentication on a macro or document. This signature confirms that the macro or document originated from the signer and has not been altered. For more information about Microsoft Office security features, visit the Microsoft Office

Online Web site ( http://office.microsoft.com

22 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Part 2: User setup

If you’re using Microsoft Dynamics GP in a multi-user environment, you need to define who can use Microsoft Dynamics GP. You also can determine the level of access each of your users have to the company information you set up.

If you’re using Microsoft Dynamics GP in a single-user environment, you don’t need to set up any additional users. You do need to set user access to each company that you create, however. See

for more information.

This part of the documentation includes:

•

Chapter 5, “User records,” explains how to create and use user records in

Microsoft Dynamics GP.

•

Chapter 6, “Security,” describes the procedures necessary to set up system and

individual security.

•

Chapter 7, “Field level security,”

describes how to provide additional security to programs, fields, forms, and windows in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

•

Chapter 8, “Shortcut administration,” describes how to set up shortcuts in user

class folders, in which shortcuts to specific tasks are organized for a class of users.

•

Chapter 9, “Activity tracking,” explains how to keep track of the activity in

your Microsoft Dynamics GP system. Activities you can track include attempts to log in and log out, access windows and tables, make changes to tables, print, complete processes such as routines and table maintenance, and posting.

24 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 5: User records

This information explains how to create and use user records in Microsoft

Dynamics GP. User records identify all the people who will be using Microsoft

Dynamics GP.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Overview of user records

•

Creating a user record

•

Copying security access from an existing user

Overview of user records

The number of user records you can create depends on the user system selected for

Microsoft Dynamics GP. If you have purchased Microsoft Dynamics GP, you are a perpetual customer. As a perpetual customer, you'll use the concurrent user system to create as many user records as you wish, regardless of the number of users you've registered for Microsoft Dynamics GP. However, the number of active users logged in to Microsoft Dynamics GP at any one time can’t exceed the number of active users you’ve registered. For example, you may have registered the accounting system for 10 users so the maximum number of active users in Microsoft Dynamics

GP can’t exceed 10. You could create 30 user records—however, only 10 of these users could be in the system at the same time.

If you have purchased the right to use Microsoft Dynamics GP for a period time, you are a subscription customer. As a subscription customer, you'll use the named user system to create as many active user records as you've registered for Microsoft

Dynamics GP. For example, you may have registered the accounting system for 10 users so the maximum number of active users in Microsoft Dynamics GP can’t exceed 10.

You can group users in user classes and specify the parts of Microsoft Dynamics GP that users will have access to, depending on the types of tasks they typically complete. For more information about user classes and security, see

Chapter 6,

“Security.”

Creating a user record

You’ll use the User Setup window to create user records. The User ID identifies each user in the Microsoft Dynamics GP system. You can’t change the user ID once the record has been saved. To change a user ID, delete the user record and reenter the user record with a different ID.

You might have some users that will only access the Microsoft Dynamics GP Web

Client, and will never use the Microsoft Dynamics GP desktop client. You can set up these users in the User Setup window as web client only users.

A user record with the ID of “sa” (system administrator) that has access to the entire system is created by default. Some procedures within Microsoft Dynamics GP require having a user with this ID.

After you enter user records, see

Setting company access

on page 34 to specify the

companies each user should have access to.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 25

P A R T 2

on page 209 for more information.

You can choose the Summary button to open the User Summary window. This window displays user information such as the status and type of user records that are already created. You also can view the number of users who are currently logged in to Microsoft Dynamics GP and the number of users allowed to log in to

Microsoft Dynamics GP by status and user type.

To create a user record with a SQL Server Login:

Open the User Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User)

In the User ID field, enter a user ID, which will be used throughout Microsoft

Dynamics GP to identify this person.

In the User Name field, enter the person’s full name.

In the Password field, enter the password this user will use when starting the accounting system.

If you don’t assign a password to the user at this time, the user will be required to enter a password before accessing Microsoft Dynamics GP.

In the Class ID field, assign the user to a class, if you wish.

See

Creating a user class

In the Status field, select a status. The user type and status determine the user’s access in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

In the User Type field, select a user type. The user type and status determine the user’s access in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

In the Home Page Role field, assign the user to a user role. The user role determines the content that is displayed on a user’s home page by default.

For more information on home pages, refer to your System User’s Guide (Help

>> Contents >> select Using the System.)

26 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 5 U S E R R E C O R D S

Mark the Payroll View for Human Resources option if you want a user’s changes to Human Resources benefit and deduction codes to update corresponding U.S. Payroll information. You should mark this option for every user who will enter or update benefit information in Human Resources.

10. You can enforce password policies for SQL Server and Windows Server.

Enforce Password Policy

Mark this option to force users to adhere to the same password policies that have been established on the Windows Server domain.

Change Password Next Login

Mark this option to force users to change their passwords the next time they log in to Microsoft Dynamics GP. The

Enforce Password Policy must be marked for this option to be available.

Enforce Password Expiration

Mark this option to force users to change their passwords after the number of days that is defined by the Windows Server domain password policies. This option is available only if you have marked the

Enforce Password Policy option. The Enforce Password Policy must be marked for this option to be available.

11. Choose Copy Access if there is an existing user that you want copy security settings such as roles, tasks, and company access to the user. See

Copying security access from an existing user

on page 28 for more information.

12. Choose Save to save the user record.

13. To print a User Preferences List showing information for the currently displayed user, choose File >> Print. You can print a similar report for all users from the User Report Options window.

To create a user record with a Windows account:

Open the User Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User)

In the User ID field, enter a user ID, which will be used throughout Microsoft

Dynamics GP to identify this person.

In the User Name field, enter the person’s full name.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 27

P A R T 2

on page 209 for more information.

In the Password field, enter the password this user will use when starting the accounting system.

If you don’t assign a password to the user at this time, the user will be required to enter a password before accessing Microsoft Dynamics GP.

In the Class ID field, assign the user to a class, if you wish.

See

Creating a user class

In the Status field, select a status. The user type and status determine the user’s access in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

In the User Type field, select a user type. The user type and status determine the user’s access in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

In the Home Page Role field, assign the user to a user role. The user role determines the content that is displayed on a user’s home page by default.

For more information on home pages, refer to your System User’s Guide (Help

>> Contents >> select Using the System.)

10. Mark the Web Client user only (no SQL Server Account) option if the user will only access the Microsoft Dynamics GP web client, and will never use the

Microsoft Dynamics GP desktop client.

11. Choose the Windows Account tab, enter the Windows login information for the user. The Window account cannot be assigned to more than one Microsoft

Dynamics GP user.

12. Choose Copy Access if there is an existing user that you want copy security settings such as roles, tasks, and company access to the user. See

Copying security access from an existing user

on page 28 for more information.

13. Choose Save to save the user record.

To print a User Preferences List showing information for the currently displayed user, choose File >> Print. You can print a similar report for all users from the User Report Options window.

Copying security access from an existing user

When you create a new user, you need to set up security tasks, security roles, and company access to the new user. To speed user set up, you can copy the user security from one user to another, including company access. For example, if you created a user ID for a new purchasing clerk, you can copy security access from the existing purchasing clerk. You also can copy security access when a current users switches positions in your company.

If you need to remove security access from a user, you remove access by copying access from a user who has no security roles, tasks, and company access.

28 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 5 U S E R R E C O R D S

To copy security access from an existing user:

Open the User Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User)

Enter information for a new user or select an existing user.

Choose the Copy Security button.

In the Copy User Security window, select the user ID you want to copy security information from.

Choose OK.

To change company access, use the User Access Setup window.

To change the security roles for a user, use User Security Setup window.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 29

30 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 6: Security

In Microsoft Dynamics GP, you can specify security settings for your system, companies, individual users and specific tasks. This information explains the procedures you’ll perform to secure Microsoft Dynamics GP for your organization.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Overview of Microsoft Dynamics GP security

•

Security Synchronization Utility

•

How passwords are used in Microsoft Dynamics GP

•

Items you can set security for

•

Setting system security

•

Setting company access

•

Creating security tasks

•

Creating security roles

•

Setting up individual user security

•

Activating user security

•

Verifying security settings with an integrating product

•

Setting access to alternate/modified forms and reports

•

Deleting security records

•

Setting up security for viewing data connections and Microsoft Excel reports

•

Setting up access to SQL Server Reporting Services reports

•

User security troubleshooting

Overview of Microsoft Dynamics GP security

Microsoft Dynamics GP provides several types of security:

System

System security controls access to systemwide setup information, such as setting up new user records, assigning user security or printing reports that contain that information. System level security is controlled through the use of a password;

only a few people should know the password. See

Setting system security

on page 34

for more information.

Company

Company security controls access to companies on a per-user basis.

When you set up a new user record, that person doesn’t have access to any companies. You’ll need to grant access, using the User Access Setup window, before the user can log in to Microsoft Dynamics GP. See

Setting company access

on page 34

for more information.

Security tasks

Security tasks are assigned to roles and grant access to windows, reports, files, and other resources within Microsoft Dynamics GP that users need to access to complete a specific task. Some default security tasks have been created for you. For example, the DEFAULTUSER task allows users to access things that most users will need to access in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

Security roles

Security roles contain the security tasks that a user needs to access to do their job. Some default security roles have been created for you. For example, the ACCOUNTING MANAGER* role contains security tasks that allow a user who is assigned to this role to view General Ledger account information, enter journal entries, enter bank transactions, and perform other tasks that an accounting manager might need to perform.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 31

P A R T 2

Chapter 35, “Account security.”

Individual users

Individual security is role-based in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

Each user must be assigned to a security role before they can access any forms, reports, or other data within Microsoft Dynamics GP. To begin assigning user security, identify the daily tasks that a user completes within Microsoft Dynamics

GP. Then either select from the default security roles or create new security roles that only grant access to the tasks that the user needs.

For example, user ABC is an accounting manager for Fabrikam, Inc., and needs access to set up General Ledger, taxes, bank accounts, and credit cards as well as perform many other accounting tasks. Review the default security roles in Microsoft

Dynamics GP to find one that grants access to the appropriate accounting functionality for user ABC. For our example, the ACCOUNTING MANAGER* security role is appropriate for user ABC. Use the User Security Setup Window to assign the ACCOUNTING MANAGER* security role to user ABC in the Fabrikam,

Inc. company.

Module-specific tasks

Most Microsoft Dynamics GP modules have specific tasks that can be set up to require a password; each task can have a different password. If a password is required, all users attempting to complete that task must enter the password. See the setup documentation for each accounting module for information about these passwords.

Account

Account-level security enhances security and account views. Users can enter, edit, and view information from a reduced account set based on the access granted for accounts. For more information, see

Field level security

Field level security restricts access to any field, window, or form in Microsoft Dynamics GP. It allows you to apply a password, or to make a window or form unavailable. It also allows you to hide, lock, or apply passwords to fields. See

Chapter 7, “Field level security,” for more information.

Security Synchronization Utility

The Security Synchronization Utility can be used to synchronize security for

Microsoft Dynamics GP, Web Services, and Business Portal. The Security

Synchronization Utility enables you to synchronize role membership between applications with different security infrastructures and different administration experiences. For example, you can synchronize a Business Portal role with a

SharePoint group, or you can synchronize a Microsoft Dynamics GP role with a web services role.

The Security Synchronization Utility is a Microsoft Management Console snap-in that allows you to synchronize security permissions between applications. By default, the following applications can be synchronized:

• Microsoft Dynamics GP

• Web Services for Microsoft Dynamics GP

• Business Portal

You can synchronize from any supported application to any other supported application. For example, you can synchronize members of a Business Portal role with members of a SharePoint group, or vice versa.

To use the utility with Microsoft Dynamics GP, the Microsoft Dynamics GP administrator must first map Windows user IDs to Microsoft Dynamics GP user IDs using the Microsoft Dynamics Security Console. Refer to the Microsoft Dynamics

32 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 6 S E C U R I T Y

GP Web Services Installation and Administration Guide for more information about the Dynamics Security Console.

The Security Synchronization Utility is available as a download on CustomerSource only. Refer to the documentation that is included with the utility for more information.

How passwords are used in Microsoft Dynamics GP

Microsoft Dynamics GP uses passwords to control access to a company and selected parts of the accounting system. Passwords can contain uppercase and lowercase letters, numeric characters, spaces, and special characters.

There are three types of passwords:

User passwords

User passwords control whether a particular user has access to

Microsoft Dynamics GP. User passwords are initially set up in the User Setup window. Users can change their own passwords using the User Password Setup window.

System passwords

The system password controls access to systemwide setup information, such as setting up new user records, assigning user security, or printing reports that contain that information. The system password is set up using the System Password Setup window. Only a few people should know the system password.

Task passwords

Items you can set security for

You can set security for the following items in the Microsoft Dynamics GP product:

Type Description

Windows

Reports

Modified Windows

Modified Reports

Windows in the selected product.

Reports in the selected product.

Windows customized using Modifier.

Primary copies of reports created using Report Writer.

Note: The Report Writer name of the report appears in this list. The

Report Writer name is the one that appears in the title bar of the

Screen Output window when you print a report.

Files

Alternate Microsoft

Dynamics GP Reports*

Tables in the selected product.

Microsoft Dynamics GP reports that have been incorporated into integrating products you’ve installed.

Alternate Microsoft

Dynamics GP Windows*

Microsoft Dynamics GP windows that have been incorporated into integrating products you’ve installed.

Alternate reports that have been modified using Report Writer.

Modified Alternate

Microsoft Dynamics GP

Reports*

*These items appear only if you’re using an integrating product and have selected it in the

Product list.

**These types appear only if the corresponding item is installed and registered.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 33

P A R T 2

Type

Modified Alternate

Microsoft Dynamics GP

Windows*

Description

Alternate windows that have been modified using Modifier.

Custom Reports

Advanced Financial

Reports

Series Posting

Permissions

Customization Tools

Secondary copies and new reports created in Report Writer.

Modified advanced financial reports.

Specific posting tasks for each Microsoft Dynamics GP product you’ve purchased.

Tools you use to customize the accounting system, such as Report

Writer or the Modifier.

The Microsoft Dynamics GP Integration Manager.

Microsoft Dynamics GP

Import**

Document Access

Letters

Quotes, orders, invoices, returns, and back orders for Sales Order

Processing. Standard, blanket, drop-ship, and blanket drop-ship purchase orders for Purchase Order Processing.

Letters to customers, employees, and vendors that are available using the Letter Writing Assistant.

Navigation Lists Default primary lists. Note: If you restrict access to a primary list, access to any list view that is based on that primary list is also restricted.

*These items appear only if you’re using an integrating product and have selected it in the

Product list.

**These types appear only if the corresponding item is installed and registered.

Only main windows are listed if you select Windows. A main window is one you can open from a menu; it’s also referred to as a parent window or a primary window. Many windows that you open by clicking a button in a parent window are child windows. To deny access to a child window, deny access to the corresponding parent window.

Setting system security

When you installed Microsoft Dynamics GP, you were asked to enter a system password. You can change the system password using the System Password Setup window.

To set system security:

Open the System Password Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> System Password >> Enter the current system password)

In the Old Password field, enter the current password.

In the New Password and Reenter New Password fields, enter the new password.

Choose OK to save your changes and close the window.

Setting company access

Granting company rights to individual users allows you to control which users have access to the companies you’ve created.

34 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 6 S E C U R I T Y

Be sure to set company access using the steps in this procedure each time you do either of the following things:

Create a new user record

If you don’t set access, the user won’t be able to access any companies in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

Create a new company

If you don’t set access, no users will be able to access the company.

If you marked the Copy Access from Company option in Microsoft Dynamics GP

Utilities when you created a new company, you’ve already specified the users who will have access to this company. Complete this procedure within the User Access

Setup window only to modify the settings you copied.

After you’ve set access, each company that a user has access to will appear in the

Company Login window for that user.

LESSONUSER1, LESSONUSER2, and users with a status of Lesson User can only have access to the lesson company.

To set company access:

Open the User Access Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User Access)

From the Users list, select a user ID.

All the companies you’ve set up are shown in the Company Name list. If the user has a status of Lesson User, only the lesson company will appear in the list.

In the Access column, mark the company or companies the user will access.

If you do not have the necessary privileges, you cannot grant or remove access from a user that has a SQL Server login

When you’ve marked all the companies this user will access, repeat steps 2 and

3 to set access for other users, if necessary.

To print the Company Access Report, showing company access information entered in this window, choose File >> Print. You also can print this report using the User Report Options window.

Choose OK to close the window.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 35

P A R T 2

Items you can set security for

Creating security tasks

Security tasks contain the windows, reports, and other resources that users need to access to complete tasks in Microsoft Dynamics GP. Refer to

on page 33 for a list of the types of objects that can make up a task.

To create a security task:

Open the Security Task Setup window

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Security Tasks)

Enter a task ID.

To save time, you can copy all security settings from an existing task into the task that you are about to create. Choose Copy to do this, otherwise, skip to step

The Copy Security Task window is displayed. Enter an existing security task ID to copy settings from.

Choose OK. The Copy Security Task window closes and the Security Task Setup window now contains the security settings of the task that you copied.

Enter a name and description for the task.

Select a category for the task.

Select a product from the Product list. If you’re using integrating products with

Microsoft Dynamics GP, they are displayed in the list in addition to Microsoft

Dynamics GP.

In the Type list, select the type of item you want to limit access to. See

Items you can set security for

on page 33 for information about the types shown in the list.

36 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 6 S E C U R I T Y

10. Using the Series list, specify the series you want to set access to. For example, to grant access to a window, report or other resource in General Ledger, select

Financial from the Series drop-down list.

11. Using the Access list, mark an item to grant access to it and unmark an item to remove access.

You can choose the Unmark All button to unmark all items that appear in the list, or Mark All to mark all items in the list. You can mark the Display Selected

Items option if you want the list to show only the items that you have granted access to.

Double-click a window or report in the Access List to view it.

12. Repeat steps 9 through 11 to set security for all series.

13. Choose Save to save your changes.

Creating security roles

Use the Security Role Setup window to create new security roles. Security roles can contain multiple security tasks and can be assigned to users to provide them with security access to groups of tasks in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

To create security roles:

Open the Security Role Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Security Roles)

Enter a role ID.

To save time, you can copy all security tasks from an existing role into the role that you are about to create. Choose Copy to do this, otherwise, skip to step 6.

The Copy Security Role window is displayed. Enter an existing security role ID to copy security tasks from.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 37

P A R T 2

Creating security tasks

Choose OK. The Copy Security Role window closes and the Security Role Setup window now contains the security tasks of the role that you copied.

Enter a name for the role.

Enter a description for the role.

Select a category from the drop-down list to display the tasks for that category.

Mark the security tasks that users who are assigned to this role should have access to.

You can choose the Unmark All button to unmark all tasks that appear in the list, or Mark All to mark all tasks in the list. You can mark the Display Selected

Roles option if you want the list to show only the items that you have granted access to.

Double-click a task to view information about that task.

10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 to set security for all categories for this security role.

11. Choose Save to save your changes.

Setting up individual user security

Use this procedure to set up individual security settings for each user, in each company. Complete this procedure each time you create a new company or a new user record.

If you marked the Copy Access from Company option in Microsoft Dynamics GP

Utilities when you created a new company, you’ve already set up user security for this company. Complete this procedure using the User Security Setup window only to modify the settings you copied.

Security is defined for each user on a company-by-company basis; be sure to set security for each company accessed by the user.

Security tasks and security roles already must be set up before you can set up individual user security. Refer to

on page 36 and Creating security roles on page 37

for more information.

38 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 6 S E C U R I T Y

To set up individual user security:

Open the User Security Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User Security)

In the User field, select the user ID of the person for whom you’re setting security. Once you’ve selected a user ID, all the companies the user has access to are shown in the Company list.

In the Company list, select a company. The security you set for a company will apply to the user only when he or she accesses that company. Once you’ve selected a Company, all the security roles are listed.

Mark all the roles that the user should be assigned to.

You can mark the Display Selected Roles option to list only the roles for which access has been granted.

To specify which alternate or modified forms and reports that the user should have access to, select an Alternate/Modified Forms and Reports ID from the drop-down list.

To create a new Alternate/Modified Forms and Reports ID, refer to

Setting access to alternate/modified forms and reports

on page 40.

Choose the AFA Reports button to open the Advanced Financial Analysis

Reports Security window where you can specify which Advanced Financial

Analysis reports the user should have access to.

By default, users have access to all Advanced Financial Analysis reports. However, users can only view an Advanced Financial Analysis report if they also are granted access to the Advanced Financial Analysis windows that are associated with that report.

To print a User Security Report for the selected user, choose File >> Print. You also can print this report using the Security Report Options window.

Choose Copy to open the Copy User Security window if you want the user to have the same security access in other companies that the user has access to, otherwise skip to step 11.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 39

P A R T 2

assigned to individual users. For more information, refer to

In the Copy User Security window, a list of companies that the selected user has access to is displayed. Mark the companies that you want to copy this user’s security settings to.

10. Choose OK to save your changes and close the Copy User Security window.

11. In the User Security Setup window, choose Save.

Activating user security

To begin using individual security, you be sure that the Security option in the

Company Setup window is marked. User security doesn’t function unless you activate it in that window.

User security doesn’t affect passwords you’ve set up to allow access to Microsoft Dynamics

GP, or to grant permission to perform certain accounting tasks such as overriding a price.

To activate user security:

Open the Company Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company)

Be sure the correct company is displayed in the Company Name field.

Mark the Security check box if it is not already marked, otherwise, skip to step

Enter the system password and choose OK. A message will appear, indicating that user security is active.

Choose OK to save your changes and close the Company Setup window.

If you want to temporarily turn off your security system at some other time, you can open this window again and unmark the Security option, allowing all users unlimited access to the company.

Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each of your companies. You must log in to each company to activate user security for that company.

Verifying security settings with an integrating product

After you install an integrating product, you must give users security access to that integrating product before it can be used. You may have to modify existing security tasks and roles or create new security tasks and roles before you can modify a user’s security settings. However, depending on the integrating product, there already may be default security tasks and roles that you can use when you modify a user’s security settings in the User Security Setup window.

Setting access to alternate/modified forms and reports

Alternate forms and reports are forms and reports that have been incorporated into integrating products that you’ve installed. Modified forms and reports are existing

Microsoft Dynamics GP forms and reports that have been modified using Report

Writer or Modifier. Some of these forms or reports are provided access by default,

40 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 6 S E C U R I T Y others you must grant access to using the Alternate/Modified Forms and Reports window.

Alternate/modified forms and reports IDs grant access to groups of alternate/ modified forms and reports within Microsoft Dynamics GP. These IDs are then

Setting up individual user security

on page 38.

When your company purchases integrating products, you can modify security settings to include all alternate forms and reports for the product at once. Or, you can selectively choose which alternate/modified forms or reports you want for each

ID.

If you discontinue using a product that contains alternate or modified forms and reports, or are changing your security structure, you can change all settings to the original defaults. See

To reset alternate/modified forms and reports to original settings:

for

more information.

To set access to alternate/modified forms and reports:

Open the Alternate/Modified Forms and Reports window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Alternate/Modified Forms and

Reports)

Enter an ID and description.

Select a product from the Product list. If you’re using integrating products with

Microsoft Dynamics GP, they are displayed in the list in addition to Microsoft

Dynamics GP.

In the Type list, select the type of item you want to set access for.

Select the series you want to set access for. This will narrow down the list of windows or reports in the list if you’re setting access to specific windows or reports.

Select the integrating product in the Select list. The alternate forms or reports will appear in the list, with the Microsoft Dynamics GP option selected by default.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 41

P A R T 2

Click Change All. The access will be changed to the integrating product for all forms or reports.

You can use the Show/Hide button to expand the Alternate/Modified Forms and

Reports List to grant access to individual forms or reports.

Repeat steps 3 through 7 to set access to the alternate/modified forms and reports for any other products.

Choose Save.

To reset alternate/modified forms and reports to original settings:

Open the Alternate/Modified Forms and Reports window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Alternate/Modified Forms and

Reports)

Enter an ID and description.

Select a product from the Product list. If you’re using integrating products with

Microsoft Dynamics GP, they are displayed in the list in addition to Microsoft

Dynamics GP.

In the Type list, select the type of item you want to set access for.

Select the series you want to restore original settings for, or select All to reset the original settings for all of your system.

Select Revert to Default from the Select list.

Choose Change All. The access will be changed to the settings from the time of your original Microsoft Dynamics GP installation.

Choose Save.

To view alternate/modified forms and reports settings:

Open the Alternate/Modified Forms and Reports window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Alternate/Modified Forms and

Reports)

Select the ID, Product, Type and Series you want to view.

Mark Display Selected. The Alternate/Modified Forms and Reports List will display only the options selected for the criteria above. Changes can’t be made when this box is marked.

The Show/Hide button above the list will expand or collapse the list.

Deleting security records

Use the Remove Security Setup Records window to delete groups of security task

IDs, security role IDs, and alternate/modified forms and reports IDs.

42 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 6 S E C U R I T Y

To delete security records:

Open the Remove Security Setup Records window.

(Administration >> Utilities >> System >> Remove Security Setup Records)

Select the type of security records that you want to delete.

• Select Security Tasks to delete a group of security task IDs. You cannot delete a security task that is currently assigned to a security role.

• Select Security Roles to delete a group of security role IDs. You cannot delete a security role if it is currently assigned to a user.

• Select Alternate/Modified Forms and Reports to delete a group of alternate/modified forms and reports IDs. You cannot delete an alternate/ modified forms and reports ID if is currently assigned to a user.

Select the range of IDs to delete.

Choose Process to delete the range of IDs for the type of security record that you selected.

Setting up security for viewing data connections and

Microsoft Excel reports

Users need extra privileges in SQL Server before they can view the Microsoft

Dynamics GP data that is displayed in data connections and Excel reports.

A Default SQL Server Fixed Database role that corresponds with each data connection and Excel report is created during the installation of Microsoft

Dynamics GP. Each role begins with “rpt_” and contains SELECT access to the

Microsoft Dynamics GP data for the data connection or report that the role corresponds to.

Users should be added as members to the SQL Server roles that correspond to the reports or data connections that they need access to.

There should also be links to procedures for setting security on the shared folders on the network or SharePoint, depending on how the sysadmin wants to deploy the excel reports.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 43

P A R T 2

Microsoft Excel reports are deployed. For more information, refer to Chapter 40,

To set up security for viewing data connections and

Microsoft Excel reports:

Create new local groups on the server where the data connections and

“Excel report deployment,” and your Windows Server documentation.

Assign each local group to the default SQL Server fixed database role that corresponds to the report that group will need access to. For more information about adding an Active Directory group to a SQL Server fixed database role, refer to your SQL Server documentation.

Add domain users or domain groups to the local groups that you set up in step

Setting up access to SQL Server Reporting Services reports

Users need extra privileges in SQL Server and Report Manager before they can view the Microsoft Dynamics GP data that is displayed in SQL Server Reporting Services reports.

Default SQL Server roles are created when you install Microsoft Dynamics GP. Each

SQL Server role that begins with “rpt_” has enough access to view the Microsoft

Dynamics GP data that is displayed in a report. To view a SQL Server Reporting

Services report, a user, or a Windows (local machine) group that the user belongs to, must be added as a member to the SQL Server roles that correspond to that report and the user must be granted access to that SQL Server Reporting Services report in

Report Manager.

For detailed information about SQL Server Reporting Services, refer to the SQL

Server Reporting Services Guide. This guide describes how to install Reporting

Services, how to deploy predefined reports that are included in Microsoft Dynamics

GP to a server, and how to set up security for reports. Check the Using Microsoft

Dynamics GP 2010 Web site ( http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=249465 ) for the most current documentation.

To set up access for SQL Server Reporting Services reports:

Create new local groups on the Web server where the SQL Reporting Services reports are deployed. For more information, refer to

Deploying SQL Server

Reporting Services reports

on page 244 and your Windows Server documentation.

Assign each local group to the default SQL Server fixed database role that corresponds to the report that group needs access to. For more information about adding an active directory group to a SQL Server fixed database role, refer to your SQL Server documentation.

Using Report Manager, grant access to the SQL Reporting Services reports for the local groups that you created in step 1.

Add domain users or domain groups to the local groups that you set up in step

1. For more information, refer to your Windows Server documentation.

44 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 6 S E C U R I T Y

If your SQL Reporting Services reports are stored on a different computer than either the Microsoft Dynamics GP server or the server running Microsoft SQL

Server, you must use Kerberos authentication in SQL Server to allow user credentials to be passed to the SQL Server so that users can view SQL Reporting

Services reports.

Refer to Knowledge Base article 319723: How to use Kerberos authentication in

SQL Server (http://support.microsoft.com/kb/319723/en-us) and complete

Step 1: Configure the domain controller and Step 2: Configure the IIS services server to

use Kerberos authentication on SQL Server.

User security troubleshooting

Many of the processes in Microsoft Dynamics GP, such as posting or printing, require that the user performing the process be able to access multiple windows and reports. If you deny a user access to an item that’s part of a process, the user won’t be able to complete that process. A message may appear stating that the user isn’t privileged to open the resource. However, Microsoft Dynamics GP may not always display a message indicating the problem; the process may simply not be completed.

If a user encounters problems completing a process, verify that the roles that are assigned to the user in the User Security Setup window contain the tasks that the user needs to complete the process. The problem may be caused by the user not having access to all the items used in the process. Contact Microsoft Dynamics GP

Technical Support if you need additional assistance.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 45

46 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 7: Field level security

Field level security restricts access to any field, window, or form in Microsoft

Dynamics GP. It allows you to apply a password, or to make a window or form unavailable. It also allows you to hide, lock, or apply passwords to fields.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Adding or modifying a field security ID

•

Copying a field security ID

•

Security modes

•

Resource Explorer

•

Creating a password

Adding or modifying a field security ID

Use the Field Security Maintenance window to assign field level security IDs, which are necessary to define user passwords, and to lock, hide, or make windows, forms, and fields unavailable. The Field Security Maintenance window also allows you to modify, add, or delete field security IDs.

To add or modify a field security ID:

Open the Field Level Security window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Field Level Security)

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 47

P A R T 2

Choose Add to open the Field Security Maintenance window.

You also can double-click an existing field security ID in the Field Security window to open the Field Level Security Maintenance and continue through this procedure.

Enter or modify the Field Security ID field and a description.

Choose the product name lookup button to open the Resource Explorer window.

Select an object from the Resource Explorer window to apply security to. For more information refer to

Resource Explorer

on page 49.

Apply or modify the security mode for the field, form, or window you have selected. For more information refer to

Security modes

on page 49.

If you selected a security mode that requires a password, enter or select a password ID in the Password ID field.

Choose Save.

You can now use the Field Level Security window to apply this field security ID to users and user classes.

Copying a field security ID

Use the Field Security Maintenance window to copy an existing field security ID to create a new one. To create a new field security ID that will be similar to an existing field security ID, you can copy the existing field security ID as your new field security ID and then modify it.

To copy a field security ID:

Open the Field Level Security window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Field Level Security)

Double-click on a field security ID in the field security object tree to open the

Field Security Maintenance window.

Choose Copy.

Enter a new ID in the Field Security ID field.

Modify fields, as necessary.

48 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 7 F I E L D L E V E L S E C U R I T Y

Choose Save.

Security modes

You can select the following security modes from the Field Level Security

Maintenance window to give security to fields, forms, or windows.

Password Before

You must enter a password before getting access to a field.

Password After

You must enter a password after modifying a field for the changes to be saved.

Warning Before

A warning will be displayed and access to that field will be denied.

Lock Field

You can’t use or modify the field.

Disable Field

The field will be displayed but it will not be available.

Hide Field

The field won’t be displayed.

Password Window

You must to enter a password before access to the window is permitted.

Disable Window

Enter the system administrator’s password to have access to the window.

Password Form

Users or classes must enter the correct password before access to the form is permitted.

Disable Form

You must enter the system administrator’s password to modify the form.

Resource Explorer

The Resource Explorer window opens when you choose the lookup button for the

Product Name field. Use the Resource Explorer to look up forms, fields, and tables.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 49

P A R T 2

Shortcuts and user classes

The objects tree is located in the left pane of the Resource Explorer window. Choose the plus sign next to an object to open it in the objects tree.

• Double-click on an object to open it in the right pane of the Resource Explorer window.

• Select an object in the right pane and choose OK to enter it into the Field

Security Maintenance window.

Creating a password

Use the Password Maintenance window to create and modify passwords that you assign to a field, form, or window.

To create a password:

Open the Password Maintenance window by clicking the underlined password

ID in the Field Security Maintenance window.

You also can open the Password Maintenance window by opening the lookup window for the password field. You can either select a current password, or you can choose New to clear the fields.

Enter a password ID and a description.

Enter the password.

Choose Save.

You can continue to create new passwords, modify existing passwords, or return to the Field Security Maintenance window.

• To create more passwords, choose Clear and repeat steps 2-5.

• To modify other passwords, select an existing password and make changes, as necessary.

• To exit, close the window.

50 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 8: Shortcut administration

With shortcut navigation, you can organize shortcuts to the windows, macros, applications, and web sites you frequently use while working in Microsoft

Dynamics GP.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

•

Assigning shortcuts to a new user class folder

•

Adding shortcuts to an existing user class folder

For general information about the shortcut bar and creating shortcuts, see your

System User’s Guide (Help >> Contents >> Using The System).

Shortcuts and user classes

The system administrator’s or Microsoft Dynamics GP system administrator’s shortcuts include a User Classes folder by default. For each user class in the

Microsoft Dynamics GP system, a corresponding folder is located inside the User

Classes folder. When you create a new user class, the corresponding user class shortcut folder is created automatically.

The shortcut folder is named the same as the description for the user class. For example, if the class ID is SALES and the description is Sales Clerk, the shortcut folder is Sales Clerk. To change the name of the user class folder, change the description of the user class in the User Class Setup window.

When you assign a user to a user class, the corresponding user class folder appears in the list of shortcuts in the navigation pane for that user. User Classes folders can’t be renamed or repositioned by non-administrative users.

Assigning shortcuts to a new user class folder

You can organize shortcuts to user-specific tasks by grouping them into user class folders in the list of shortcuts in the navigation pane. Users can’t delete or modify a user class folder that appears in their list of shortcuts.

To assign shortcuts to a new user class folder:

Open the User Class Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User Classes)

Enter a class ID.

Enter a description for the user class. This description will be the name of the user class folder in the list of shortcuts.

By default, the new user class will have access to all resources in the system.

Deny access to selected portions of the system, if desired.

Choose Save to save the user class.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 51

P A R T 2

Setting up activity tracking

In the User Classes folder, locate the folder for the user class you just created.

Add shortcuts to the folder by dragging an existing shortcut from your list of shortcuts into the user class folder.

Adding shortcuts to an existing user class folder

As soon as you add a shortcut to a user class folder, users assigned to that user class can see the shortcut by closing and reopening their user class folder.

To add shortcuts to an existing user class folder:

In the User Classes folder in the list of shortcuts, locate the folder for the user class you want to add shortcuts to. Drag an existing shortcut from your list of shortcuts into the user class folder.

52 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 9: Activity tracking

Activity tracking allows you to keep track of the activity in your Microsoft

Dynamics GP system. You can track activities for each user, for each company, or both.

For day-to-day activity monitoring, use the activity tracking procedures in the

System Administrator’s Guide.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Activity type overview

•

•

Removing activity tracking detail

Activity type overview

The following types of activities can be tracked in Microsoft Dynamics GP. The selected activities will be tracked for all users and the companies selected in the

Activity Tracking Setup window.

Access tracking

Activity Description

Failed Attempts to Access a Table

Failed Attempts to Open a Window Tracks when a user is prevented by security from opening a window. This is a valid option only if security is being used for the company; that is, if security is set up and the

Security option is marked in the Company Setup window.

If a user is prevented from opening a window because of an alert message not related to security, that will not be tracked.

Failed Attempts to Print a Report

Tracks when a user attempts to create a report in Report

Writer using a table they do not have access to because of security. This is a valid option only if security is being used for the company.

Tracks when a user is prevented by security from printing a report. This is a valid option only if security is being used for the company. When the Print button is chosen,

Microsoft Dynamics GP verifies whether security is activated for the company.

Successful Attempts to Open

Modifier

Successful Attempts to Open

Report Writer

Successful Attempts to Open a

Window

Successful Attempts to Print a

Report

Tracks when a user successfully accesses Microsoft

Dynamics GP Modifier.

Tracks when a user successfully accesses Report Writer.

Tracks when a user opens a window successfully.

Tracks when a user is successful at starting a report to print.

Login/logout tracking

Activity Description

Successful Attempts to Log In Tracks when a user logs into a company. This takes place when initially entering Microsoft Dynamics GP and also when using the Company Login window to switch to a different company.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 53

P A R T 2

Removing activity tracking detail

Activity

Successful Attempts to Log Out

Description

Tracks when a user logs out of a company. This takes place when initially entering Microsoft Dynamics GP and also when using the Company Login window to switch to a different company.

Using the combination of tracking Successful Logins and

Successful Logouts allows you to see the length of time that a user was logged into a company.

Table tracking

Activity

Additions to Master Tables

Additions to Setup Tables

Additions to Trx Tables

Deletions from Master Tables

Deletions from Setup Tables

Deletions from Trx Tables

Modifications to Master Tables

Modifications to Setup Tables

Modifications to Trx Tables

Description

Tracks when a record is successfully added to the type of table specified. This includes only additions that are made by using a Save or an OK button. Additions that are performed through a process such as reconciling are not tracked.

Tracks when a record is successfully deleted from the type of table specified. This includes only deletions that are made by using a Delete button. Deletions that are performed through a process such as clearing history and paid transaction removal are not tracked.

Tracks when a record is successfully modified in the type of table specified. No record of the actual change is kept.

This includes only modifications that are made by using a

Save or an OK button. Modifications that are performed through a process such as reconciling are not tracked.

Process tracking

Activity

Table Maintenance Process

Routines Process

Utilities Process

Description

Tracks when any task from the Table Maintenance menu is performed such as checking links and clearing data. Both the start and end of the task are tracked (two records are created).

Tracks when any task from any routines menu is performed. Both the start and end of the task will be tracked, (two records will be created).

Tracks when any task from any utilities menu is performed.

Both the start and end of the task are tracked, (two records are created).

Posting tracking

Activity

Depends on modules registered.

Description

Depending on which modules are registered, you can choose to track posting of specific transaction types. For example, if General Ledger is installed, you could choose

Financial Clearing Entry, Financial General Entry, and

Financial Quick Entry.

Setting up activity tracking

Using the Activity Tracking Setup window, you’ll mark the activities you want

Microsoft Dynamics GP to track for each user in each company they access.

The table used to store activity information can become large in a short time if you choose to track all activity. To keep the activity table size to a minimum, track only the activities you really need to track and periodically remove the information you no longer need. Tracking successful window access and tracking any of the table activities will cause the activity tracking table to grow rapidly. For information

54 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 9 A C T I V I T Y T R A C K I N G about removing activity tracking detail, see

on page 55.

To set up activity tracking:

Open the Activity Tracking Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Activity Tracking)

Select an activity type.

Using one or more of the following techniques, mark the activities you want to track.

• In the Activity list, mark the box in the Track column next to each specific activity you want to track.

• To track all activities listed for an activity type, choose Mark All. To stop tracking any of the activities that may have been marked for an activity type, choose Unmark All.

Select a user and mark the companies for which you want activities tracked.

Select a user ID for whom you want to track Microsoft Dynamics GP activities.

In the Company Name list, mark the box in the Activate column next to the companies for which you want to track this user’s activities.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the other users you want to track activity for.

All of the users selected will have the same activities tracked.

Choose OK to save your entries and close the window.

Review the activity tracking information you’ve entered using the Activity

Tracking Setup Report. While the Activity Tracking Setup window is displayed, choose File >> Print.

Removing activity tracking detail

Use the Remove Activity Tracking Detail window to remove records from the

Activity Tracking Table, print a report that shows the information in the table, or both. All activities you track are recorded in the Activity Tracking Table. The size of

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 55

P A R T 2

Chapter 10, “Companies,” explains how to specify where a new company’s

the table can increase very quickly, even if you track only a few activities, so you’ll need to remove data from the table periodically.

Be sure to back up your company’s data before removing activity tracking detail.

To remove activity tracking detail:

Open the Remove Activity Tracking Detail window.

(Administration >> Utilities >> System >> Activity Detail)

Select an activity type.

Using one or more of the following techniques, mark the activities you want to remove or print a report for.

• In the Activity list, mark the box in the Remove/Print column next to each specific activity you want to remove or print a report for.

• To remove or print all activity detail listed for an activity type, choose Mark

All. Choose Unmark All if you don’t want to remove or print all activity detail.

Select which range type of activity detail.

Enter or select a range of activity detail.

Choose Insert to insert the range.

Choose whether you want to remove the activity detail, print a report, or both.

Choose Process to remove the activity detail. If Print Report was marked, the

Activity Tracking Report will print.

56 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Part 3: Company setup

Use this information to customize each of your companies, including company addresses, the payment terms your business uses, the way posting reports are printed, and the format of your accounts. The information is organized in the order in which you should complete it.

Company setup entries you make apply only to the company you’re using when you enter the information. If, for instance, you’ve created records for three companies and are ready to specify information about each, you must be sure that you’re applying that information to the correct company.

For additional information about setting up Microsoft Dynamics GP, detailed reference information is provided in help. Press F1 to view detailed reference information about the window that’s currently displayed.

The following information is discussed:

•

data will be stored and how to use default information for this company.

•

Chapter 11, “Accounts,” contains information about setting up an account

format and chart of accounts for each company.

•

Chapter 12, “Fiscal periods,” explains how to verify the default fiscal periods

and make changes if necessary, and how to create fiscal periods.

•

Chapter 13, “Posting setup,” describes posting procedures and the terminology

needed to understand posting.

•

Chapter 14, “Shipping methods and payment terms,” explains how to set up

additional shipping methods and payment terms, and how to make changes to existing ones.

•

Chapter 15, “Financial information,”

describes how to set up currencies, bank records, and checkbooks for each company.

•

Chapter 16, “E-mail setup for documents,”

describes how to set up e-mail functionality for each company.

•

Chapter 17, “Document attachment setup,” describes how to set up document

attachment functionality for each company.

•

Chapter 18, “Intrastat setup,” explains how to set up your system to track

statistics for Intrastat, the method for collecting statistics on the trade of goods between European Union (EU) countries.

58 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 10: Companies

This information explains how to specify where a new company’s data will be stored and how to use default information for this company.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Company overview

•

Setting up your first company

•

Creating an additional company in Microsoft Dynamics GP

•

Setting access to a new company

•

Switching to the company you just created

•

Setting up company address information

•

Setting up company options

•

Setting up company Internet information

•

Customizing an Internet Information label

•

Setting up company user-defined fields

•

Setting up a language

Company overview

In Microsoft Dynamics GP, you can set up an unlimited number of companies. Each company tracks information for a particular organization such as a corporation or a partnership. In general, information from one company is not shared with other companies.

All information for a company in Microsoft Dynamics GP is typically stored within a single folder on your computer or network, or in a single database.

Setting up your first company

The process for creating your first company varies, depending on whether you installed the sample company, Fabrikam, Inc. If you installed the sample company, that company is considered the “first company.” To set up your own company, see

Creating an additional company in Microsoft Dynamics GP

on page 60.

Your first company must be created using Microsoft Dynamics GP Utilities. For more information on Microsoft Dynamics GP Utilities, refer to your Microsoft

Dynamics GP desktop install and upgrade information.

Once you’ve created your first company, see

Creating an additional company in

Microsoft Dynamics GP

on page 60 to create more companies.

To set up your first company:

Start Microsoft Dynamics GP; the Welcome to Microsoft Dynamics GP window appears.

Select your user ID and enter a password.

Mark the Remember user and password option to automatically log in to

Microsoft Dynamics GP the next time you start Microsoft Dynamics GP. This option is available if you have marked the Enable Remember User field in the

System Preferences window.

Choose OK.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 59

P A R T 3

Setting up company address information

In the Company Login window, select the company you want to set up.

Mark the Remember this company option to automatically log in to the company the next time you start Microsoft Dynamics GP. You should mark this option for the company you work with the most often.

Choose OK.

The name of the company will be displayed on the toolbar.

Many of the company setup procedures can be completed using selections from the Administration area page (Administration >> Setup >> Company).

Continue to

on page 62.

Creating an additional company in Microsoft

Dynamics GP

If you’re using Microsoft Dynamics GP to track information for multiple companies, you can copy user access information to additional companies you create. Be sure to completely set up your first company and assign user access before creating subsequent companies.

You can copy two types of setup information from any other company (including the sample company) to the new company you’re setting up:

• The users who will have access to this company, which you also can set up in the User Access Setup window.

• The individual items each user has access to within the company, which you can set up in the User Security Setup window.

We recommend installing the default chart of accounts, shipping methods, and payment terms, unless you plan to import that information from your previous accounting system. Using the default entries will streamline the setup process.

You’ll be able to make modifications to the default entries.

You’ll use the Create Company window to create additional companies. How you create additional companies will vary based on the type of database you’re using.

To create an additional company in Microsoft Dynamics

GP:

Start Microsoft Dynamics GP Utilities to create a new database for the company and allocate space for it. See your Installation documentation for more information.

(Start >> Programs >> Microsoft Dynamics >> GP >> GP Utilities)

Be sure you are logged in to Windows as a system administrator.

In the Welcome to Microsoft Dynamics GP Utilities window, verify your server name, and enter your administrator user ID and password; then choose OK.

You must be logged in as sa or as a system administrator to perform database and system functions within Microsoft Dynamics GP Utilities.

60 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 0 C O M P A N I E S

The Welcome to Microsoft Dynamics GP Utilities window opens when you are logged into the server you selected. Choose Next until the Additional Tasks window opens.

In the Additional Tasks window, select the Create a Company option and choose Process.

In the Create Company window, enter a company ID and name. Once you save this company, this name can be changed in the Company Setup window, if necessary.

Mark to install shipping methods and payment terms (optional). If you don’t mark this option, you can set up shipping methods and payment terms by following the procedures in

Chapter 14, “Shipping methods and payment terms.”

To load a default chart of accounts, mark the Load Default Data option, then select a business type and an industry type (optional).

To copy user access information from another company, mark the Copy Access

From Company option and select a company to copy from (optional).

Copying user access includes all users and security for those users. Access information for lesson users, inactive users, and web client users will not be copied.

Choose Next.

10. In the Database Setup window, select a default location for new files that will be created and choose Next.

11. In the Create Database window, choose Next.

12. In the Confirmation window, choose Finish.

Setting access to a new company

You’ll use the User Access Setup window to assign access to the company or companies you just created to specific users.

To set access to a new company:

Open the User Access Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User Access)

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 61

P A R T 3

Select a user ID.

Mark the box next to each company this user should have access to.

Choose OK to save your changes.

Switching to the company you just created

You can access the new company from the Company Login window.

To switch to the company you just created:

On the Microsoft Dynamics GP menu, choose User and Company.

In the Company Login window, select the appropriate company, then choose

OK.

To verify the company you’re accessing, check the Microsoft Dynamics GP application window status bar; the current company is displayed there.

Setting up company address information

Once you’ve created a company, you’ll need to enter additional information for it.

Use the Company Setup window to enter addresses for the selected company.

The main address entered in this procedure will appear on all documents, such as invoices and checks. However, if your business has several locations or different departments and contacts, you can set up multiple addresses, which you can print on those documents instead.

To set up company address information:

Open the Company Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company)

In the Address ID field, enter an ID for the company’s main address.

62 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 0 C O M P A N I E S

Enter the company’s main address.

Skip the tax, user-defined and security fields for now; you’ll return to this window after you’ve set up additional options for your company and you can finish entering the other information then. The tax information you need to enter for your company differs depending on what countries or regions you do business in. In addition, you’ll need to set up tax details and tax schedules before assigning them to your company using the

Company Setup window.

To enter addresses for additional locations, departments or contacts, choose the

Address button to display the Company Addresses Setup window.

In the Address ID field, enter a short name for the location, department or contact.

Enter the address information.

Choose Save to save the address.

Repeat steps 5 through 7 for additional addresses. When you’ve finished entering addresses, close the window.

In the Company Setup window, choose OK to save the addresses you’ve entered.

10. To print a list of the company settings, open the Company Setup window; then choose File >> Print.

The Company Settings List is printed, showing information that was entered using the Company Setup window. You also can print this report using the

Setup Reports window (Administration >> Reports >> Company >> Setup).

11. To print a Company Addresses Report showing information for all the addresses you’ve set up for this company, use the Company Setup Report

Options window.

Setting up company options

Use the Company Setup Options window to enter additional company setup options such as separating payment distributions, tracking Intrastat Statistics, and merging trade discount distributions.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 63

P A R T 3

Mark the options you want to include. See Part 4, Tax setup , for information

To set up company options:

Open the Company Setup Options window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company >> Options button)

about tax setup options.

Use Shipping Method when Selecting Default Tax

Schedule

Specify whether or not you want to use the shipping method when selecting the default tax schedule on a transaction. Microsoft Dynamics GP calculates taxes at the point of exchange, using the shipping method assigned to a transaction to determine the point of exchange. The shipping method will determine which tax schedule appears as a default schedule for the transaction.

If you decided not to use the shipping method to determine the default tax schedule, the tax schedule assigned to the vendor’s purchase address or the customer’s ship to address will be the default tax schedule.

Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes

Mark this option to apply taxes only to the discounted amount, regardless of when the payment is actually made.

Enable Intrastat Tracking

Mark this option if your company is required to enter Intrastat Statistics. The Intrastat Trade Report is used to report this information. When this option is marked, setup windows for Intrastat codes and Intrastat entry windows become available.

Separate Payment Distributions

Mark this option to separate document and payment distributions entered on the same transaction as if the document and payment were entered as separate transactions. You will be able to enter multiple distributions with the same distribution type and account. If you don’t mark the option, the distributions that are of the same type with the same account number will be combined.

Merge Trade Discount and Markdown Distributions in Sales

Mark this option to merge the trade discount and markdown distributions with the sales distributions. If you don’t mark this option, the trade discounts and markdown distributions will be separated from the sales distribution.

Merge Trade Discount Distributions in Purchasing

Mark this option to merge the trade discount distributions with the purchase distributions. If you

64 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 0 C O M P A N I E S didn’t mark this option, the trade discounts and markdown distributions will be separated from the sales distribution.

Calculate Tax Rebates

Mark this option to allow correcting tax amounts for a transaction with a terms discount.

Enable Posting Numbers in General Ledger

Mark this option to assign each transaction a unique sequence number during posting, in addition to the journal entry number. Use this option if you want solid numbering of transactions, without gaps. Solid numbering is a legal requirement in some countries, for auditing purposes.

Enable GST for Australia

Mark this option to set up information used to generate Goods and Services Tax (GST) calculations, designate default creditor

IDs, enter tax schedules for items, and specify printing options for tax invoices and adjustment notes.

Enable Tax Date

Mark to enter a tax date as you enter documents during transaction entry. If you mark this option, a tax date field will be available in the date entry windows and their inquiry windows for Sales Order Processing,

Receivables Management, Invoicing, Payables Management and Purchase

Order Processing.

Enable Reverse Charge Taxes

Mark to enter reverse charge tax detail IDs in the Tax Detail Maintenance window. You’ll be able to assign reverse charge tax details to transactions in Receivings Management, Payables Management,

Purchase Order Processing, Sales Order Processing and Invoicing. Reverse charge tax information also will be printed on tax reports.

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Mark this option to calculate taxes in

General Ledger. You’ll be able to use the Tax Entry window to enter taxable transactions that can’t be entered in Payables Management, Receivables

Management, Purchase Order Processing, or Sales Order Processing. For example, a taxable reimbursement to an employee could be entered in General

Ledger, rather than in Payables Management.

Allow Summary-Level Tax Edits

Mark this option to allow edits to tax information in the tax summary window. Summary tax edits won’t change the taxes calculated at the detail level. If this option isn’t marked, you will have to edit tax information using the tax detail entry windows.

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

Mark to require the pre-tax amount to be fully distributed among the tax details of the transaction. When tax details are required to match the pre-tax amount, you’ll have to assign tax schedules so taxes are calculated or enter a tax detail during transaction entry so the goods value matches pre-tax amount.

When this option is marked, you are required to enter a zero percent tax detail in the Tax Detail for System Processes field for receivables and payables documents that are automatically generated within the system.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 65

P A R T 3

Processing windows. For more information, refer to

The pre-tax amount is the sale or purchase amount (less any trade discount) plus freight and miscellaneous charges. If the module you’re working with is set up to calculate terms discounts before taxes, the discount available amount is deducted from the pre-tax amount.

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculation

Specify whether or not you want specific tax details to calculate tax. When this option is marked, you can select which tax details assigned to a tax schedule in the Tax Schedule

Maintenance window should calculate tax. You can select as many details as you want to calculate tax for the schedule in the Tax Schedule Maintenance window.

Enable VAT Return

Mark this option to generate summary and detailed

Value-added Tax (VAT) information for a specified period, helping to meet governmental VAT reporting requirements.

Enable EU Transaction Tracking

Mark this option to indicate whether a transaction is an EU transaction without using Intrastat Statistics. The vendor’s or customer’s tax registration number will be printed on documents.

Enable DDR and European Electronic Funds Transfer

Mark this option to enter electronic funds transfers for manual payments and computer checks in Payables Management, and to set up electronic funds transfer information for your checkbooks, vendors and customers.

If you mark this option, you must use the Checkbook Maintenance Window

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Checkbook) to assign a cash-in-transit account for an existing checkbook. For more information, refer to the “EFT checkbook setup” chapter in the Electronic Banking documentation.

Enable Canadian Tax Detail

Mark this option to be able to select the tax detail posting account and to view the amounts inclusive of tax in the

Receivables Management, Sales Order Processing, and Purchase Order

Canadian tax detail option

on page 140.

If you have marked the Enable Posting Numbers in General Ledger option, choose an option for the Display Posting Number Per field. For more information, see

Specifying posting report options

on page 95.

Mark to display the posting number for the fiscal year or for the fiscal period.

This Display Posting Number Per option is available only if you’ve marked

Enable Posting Numbers in General Ledger.

Choose OK to return to the Company Setup window.

Setting up company Internet information

Microsoft Dynamics GP tracks Internet-related information about your company, such as e-mail addresses, Web page URLs, and FTP sites. If you’ve set up multiple addresses for your company, you can track Internet information for each address.

Use the Internet Information window to set up company Internet information.

66 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 0 C O M P A N I E S

To set up company Internet information:

Open the Internet Information window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Internet Information)

In the Select Information for field, select Company.

The current company—the company you’re currently logged in to—is displayed in the Company ID field.

In the Address ID field, enter or select an address.

Enter valid e-mail addresses (optional). You can enter multiple addresses in each field.

Enter Internet information.

Typically, the electronic mail address will be in the following form: Mailto: [email protected].

Choose Save to save your entries.

To print Internet information for the current company, choose File >> Print. The

Internet Information Report is printed, showing Internet information for the current company.

To print an Internet Information Report showing Internet information for all companies, use the General Report Options window. See Help >> Index >>

Company General Report Options window for more information.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 67

P A R T 3

For more information about how country codes are used, see

Customizing an Internet Information label

To customize the labels that appear in the Internet Information window, you can use the Internet User Defined Setup window. Be sure the labels you enter are appropriate for the Internet information you want to track for employees, customers, salespeople, vendors, and items, as well as companies.

To customize an Internet Information label:

Open the Internet User Defined Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company >> Internet User Defined button)

In the Label 1 field, enter text to describe the information you’ll track in the first field in the Internet Information window.

Repeat step 2 for the remaining labels.

Choose OK to save your changes.

Setting up company user-defined fields

Microsoft Dynamics GP provides two user-defined fields in the Company Setup window that you can use to enter additional information about your company. For example, you might want to enter your company’s slogan, or other information about the company that you want to track.

If your company is located in Europe, you must use the User Defined 1 field for your country code. The country code is printed on value-added tax documents.

To set up company user-defined fields:

Open the Company Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company)

In the User Defined 1 field, do one of the following:

• If your company is located in Europe, enter your country code.

• If your company is located outside Europe, enter additional information about your company.

Setting up country codes

on page 129.

In the User Defined 2 field, enter additional information about your company.

68 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 0 C O M P A N I E S

Choose OK to save your changes.

To add the user-defined fields to a report using Report Writer, link the Company Master table (SY_Company_MSTR) to the report and drag the fields named User Defined 1 and User Defined 2 to the report layout. For more information about adding userdefined fields to reports, refer to the Report Writer documentation.

Setting up a language

Use the Language Setup window to define languages that can be assigned to customers, vendors, and users. The languages that you set up are for your information only.

To set up a language:

Open the Language Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Language)

Enter a language.

Enter an ISO 639-1 code (optional).

Choose OK.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 69

70 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 11: Accounts

Use this information to set up an account format and chart of accounts for each company.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Account formats

•

Designing an account format

•

Default account format

•

Account formats and multidimensional analysis codes

•

Setting up an account format

•

Checking links for the Account Master table group

•

Default charts of accounts

•

Printing a list of posting accounts in Microsoft Dynamics GP

•

Account aliases

•

Understanding account segments

•

Setting up an account segment

•

Setting up a posting account in Microsoft Dynamics GP

•

Modifying a posting account

•

Deleting a posting account

Account formats

When you installed Microsoft Dynamics GP, you specified an account framework.

The account framework applies to all companies in your Microsoft Dynamics GP system, and represents the maximum length of your accounts, number of segments, and segment lengths. The account framework can’t be changed.

While Microsoft Dynamics GP imposes a limit of 66 characters and 10 segments for account formats, the maximum number of characters and segments in your system depend on the selections you made when you installed Microsoft Dynamics GP.

An account format is the structure of each account in a particular company—the length of the accounts, the number of segments, and segment lengths. Each company you set up can have a different account format, as long as it fits within the maximums you specified for the account framework. Unlike the account framework, you can change the account format for an individual company, with some restrictions.

• You can shorten one or more segments of the account format only if you haven’t set up a chart of accounts yet.

To shorten the format if you’ve entered your chart of accounts but haven’t entered transactions, you must clear data from the Account Master Table. For information on clearing data, refer to Chapter 13 of your System Administrator documentation (Help >> Contents >> select System Administration). Then you can set up a different account format and reenter your chart of accounts. Once you’ve entered transactions, including beginning balances, you can’t shorten the account length or reduce the number of segments.

• You can lengthen one or more segments in the account format, up to the account framework maximums, at any time.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 71

P A R T 3

If you lengthen the account format after entering your chart of accounts, the extra space or spaces will be inserted in the segment you specify, at the right side. For example, you could increase the first account segment from four characters to five. Your existing accounts still would contain the same characters, but with the added blank space: 6XAA__-1762. Blank spaces are added only to existing accounts, since these accounts can’t be changed; however, you can use the additional digits in any new accounts you add to the chart of accounts.

If you add segments to the current account format, the new segments will appear as blank segments at the end of each account.

Use the Account Definition Setup List, printed during installation, to verify that the values you’ll enter for the number of segments and segment lengths don’t exceed your account framework maximums.

Designing an account format

It’s important that the account format be designed to meet both the current and future needs of the company you’re setting up, since the changes you can make to the account format after you’ve started using Microsoft Dynamics GP are limited.

You can continue using the format you’ve used with your previous accounting system, or set up a new one. To create a new format, plan the different categories of information you want each segment of the account to represent. For example, if you want to use one segment each for the location, department, account, subaccount, and detail, you can set up the account format to include five segments. The location might identify an individual store within the company, and the department might represent the departmental divisions within the company. The main account segment should identify the type of account: an asset account, an expense account, and so on. Subaccount and detail segments will allow you to identify more specific information about the account.

Default account format

When you create a new company and load a default chart of accounts, the account format in the Account Format Setup window that is set up for you matches the account format of the default chart of accounts. The account format for a default chart of accounts is:

Account format

Account length

Number of segments

Length of segment 1

Length of segment 2

Length of segment 3

Default

9 characters

3 segments

3 characters

4 characters

2 characters

The account framework maximums you entered during the installation process appear as defaults in the Account Format Setup window. You can enlarge the account length, number of segments, and the length of the individual segments, up to the account framework maximums.

72 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 1 A C C O U N T S

Account formats and multidimensional analysis codes

Multidimensional analysis codes can be used for further analysis of transaction activity if you want to keep a simpler chart of accounts. Multidimensional analysis codes are best suited for analysis of a particular project or division that spans a fixed time period, such as several months or years. Account formats will remain a part of your organization for the duration of its existence. For more information, refer to the Multidimensional Analysis documentation.

Setting up an account format

The account framework maximums you entered during the installation process appear as default entries in the Account Format Setup window.

To set up an account format:

Open the Account Format Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Account Format)

Enter the account length.

You won’t be able to shorten the account length after you’ve entered transactions.

Enter the number of segments in the accounts.

Name each segment. You can change the segment names later if necessary.

Enter the length of each account segment. The combined length of the segments must equal the length of the account.

Enter the display width of each segment.

• If a segment will contain only numbers, select Standard.

• If a segment will contain letters, select one of the Expansion selections. If you’re unsure what width will work best, set up a width and then view the account in the Account Maintenance window (Financial >> Cards >>

Financial >> Account). You can return to the Account Format Setup window to adjust the width as needed.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 73

P A R T 3

Setting up a posting account in Microsoft Dynamics GP

From the Main Segment ID list, select the main segment from the list of segment names you entered in step 4. The main segment will be used on financial reports to sort your accounts. A typical main segment is the one used to indicate whether the account is an asset, liability, owners’ equity, revenue, or expense account.

In the Separate with field, enter the character that will appear between the account segments anywhere an account is displayed.

You can use any character: a dash or asterisk, a number or a letter. However, it’s best to use a character that won’t be confused with the characters in the account itself.

Choose OK in the Account Format Setup window to save the format and close the window.

10. To print the Account Format Setup List, showing the account format information for your company, open the Account Format Setup window; then choose File >> Print.

Checking links for the Account Master table group

If you change the main segment ID after you’ve entered a chart of accounts, you must check links for the Account Master table group, using the Check Links window.

To check links for the Account Master table group:

Open the Check Links window.

(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Maintenance >> Check Links)

In the Series list, be sure that Financial is displayed.

In the Logical Tables list, select Account Master and choose Insert to insert it into the Selected Tables list.

Choose OK to check links.

Default charts of accounts

When you create a new company, you have the option to load a default chart of accounts. You may want to use a default chart of accounts for the following reasons:

74 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 1 A C C O U N T S

• The chart of accounts we’ve provided reflect sound accounting practices.

• Extensive research was done to determine the most commonly used account types for the industries we’ve included.

• Even if changes need to be made after a default chart of accounts is copied for the company, setup time will be greatly reduced by using one of the charts of accounts provided with Microsoft Dynamics GP.

The default charts of accounts we’ve provided are designed to be accurate estimates of typical business practices. However, we recommend that you review the accounts and make any necessary additions or changes. To add accounts, see

on page 78. To make changes to existing

accounts, see

Modifying a posting account

on page 80; to delete accounts you don’t

need, see

Deleting a posting account

on page 80.

Printing a list of posting accounts in Microsoft

Dynamics GP

If you loaded a default chart of accounts, your posting accounts are already set up.

Use the Chart of Accounts Report window to review the chart of accounts you loaded and make any changes that are needed.

For more details about setting up posting accounts, see the General Ledger documentation.

To print a list of posting accounts in Microsoft Dynamics

GP:

Open the Chart of Accounts Report window.

(Financial >> Reports >> Financial >> Account)

From the Reports list, select Posting.

Do one of the following things:

• Select an existing report option and choose Insert to insert it in the Print list.

• Choose the New button to open the Chart of Accounts Report Options window, where you can create a report option.

• Select a report option and choose Modify to open the Chart of Accounts

Report Options window, where you can make changes to a report option.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 75

P A R T 3

When you had selected or created the report option you want to use, choose the

Print button.

The Posting Accounts List is printed, showing all of the posting accounts that have been set up for the current company.

Account aliases

An account alias is a “short name” assigned to an account. You can enter an account alias instead of the entire account in any Microsoft Dynamics GP window where you enter accounts. For example, if you’ve set up the Cash Operating account for your main branch as account 1200-0000-2100-0000-0000, you could assign an alias such as $-CO.

Using account aliases is optional. You can modify the account alias for an account at any time using the appropriate account maintenance window.

Understanding account segments

You can use the Account Segment Setup window to enter segment IDs and descriptions for each account segment number that’s used in one or more posting accounts. You also can set up account segments as you set up posting accounts.

If you don’t enter a description when you set up posting accounts, the segment descriptions will be combined to form a default account description. The segment descriptions will appear on reports and financial statements, if you select to print them for specific account segments.

For example, if you’ve created accounts for three stores and you use the first segment to differentiate the accounts for each store’s location, you could use segment definitions to identify segment numbers 100, 200, and 300 as North Store,

South Store, and Downtown Store.

If you’re using Inventory Control, you can use one of the segments to specify sites.

When you post transactions that affect inventory—such as sales transactions that reduce inventory at a specific site—the appropriate segment for the site is substituted.

For example, suppose you‘re entering cash, accounts receivable, and rent expense accounts in your chart of accounts and you want to monitor each account for each store. You can set up separate accounts for each store. When you print financial statements, you can sort the accounts by the first segment, separating each store’s accounts, or by the segment identifying the type of account, such as cash or accounts receivable.

76 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 1 A C C O U N T S

If the accounts were sorted by store—the first segment—they would appear in this order.

Account

100-1100-00

100-1200-00

100-5000-00

200-1100-00

200-1200-00

200-5000-00

300-1100-00

300-1200-00

300-5000-00

Description

Cash – North Store

Accounts Receivable – North Store

Rent Expense – North Store

Cash – South Store

Accounts Receivable – South Store

Rent Expense – South Store

Cash – Downtown Store

Accounts Receivable – Downtown Store

Rent Expense – Downtown Store

If the accounts were sorted by type of account—the second segment—they would appear in this order.

Account

100-1100-00

200-1100-00

300-1100-00

100-1200-00

200-1200-00

300-1200-00

100-5000-00

200-5000-00

300-5000-00

Description

Cash – North Store

Cash – South Store

Cash – Downtown Store

Accounts Receivable – North Store

Accounts Receivable – South Store

Accounts Receivable – Downtown Store

Rent Expense – North Store

Rent Expense – South Store

Rent Expense – Downtown Store

Setting up an account segment

Use the Account Segment Setup window to create account segments that can be combined to form account numbers. You also can create accounts without creating segments first; segments will be added as you add them when you set up accounts.

To set up an account segment:

Open the Account Segment Setup window.

(Financial >> Setup >> Financial >> Segment)

Enter a segment ID.

Enter or select an existing segment number.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 77

P A R T 3

Modifying a posting account

Enter a description for the account segment. If you include this segment in an account number and don’t specify an account description, this description will be combined with other account segment descriptions to form the account description.

Choose Save.

Setting up a posting account in Microsoft Dynamics

GP

Use the Account Maintenance window to set up posting accounts that weren’t included in the default chart of accounts you loaded. To make changes to existing accounts, see

on page 80; to delete accounts you don’t

need, see

Deleting a posting account

on page 80.

To set up a posting account in Microsoft Dynamics GP:

Open the Account Maintenance window.

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Account)

Enter an account, a description, and account alias. You can enter any combination of letters, numbers, or other characters to define the account.

For more information about account aliases, see

Account aliases

on page 76.

If you don’t want users to enter this account on transaction distributions unless it is selected as a default posting account, unmark the Allow Account Entry option.

In the Category field, enter or select an account category. Account categories are used to group the accounts that appear on financial statements.

In the Posting Type box, make one of the following selections:

• Mark Balance Sheet if the account is an asset, liability, or equity account that retains a balance throughout the life of the business.

• Mark Profit and Loss if the account is a revenue or expense account whose balance is transferred to a Retained Earnings account (or accounts) at the end of the fiscal year.

78 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 1 A C C O U N T S

In the Typical Balance box, make one of the following selections:

• Mark Debit if the account is an asset or expense account.

• Mark Credit if the account is a liability, revenue, or equity account.

In the Level of Posting from Series fields, specify how much detail you want to post to General Ledger from each series, if the transaction origin is set up to use account settings:

• Select Detail if you want to post detailed information about each line item for a group of transactions.

• Select Summary if you want to post a summarized total for an entire group of transactions for this account.

See

Posting in detail from subsidiary ledgers

on page 91 for information about how

these selections work together.

In the Include in Lookup list, select the Microsoft Dynamics GP product series where you plan to use this account; the account will appear in lookup windows for each selected series. (Hold down the

SHIFT

key to select multiple series.)

If you’re using Multicurrency Management, choose the Currency button and assign currencies to the account. You also can select which accounts to revalue and whether to post the revaluation results to the account or to the financial offset. For information, see Help >> Index >> Select Account Currencies window.

10. Choose Save to save the account.

11. To print a Posting Accounts List for the account that’s displayed, choose File >>

Print. You also can print this report for all accounts using the Chart of Accounts

Report window.

Modifying a posting account

You can make changes to the default posting accounts, if necessary, using the

Account Maintenance window.

To modify a posting account:

Open the Account Maintenance window.

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Account)

In the Account field, enter or select the account you want to change.

Make your changes.

Choose Save to save your changes.

Deleting a posting account

If you don’t need one or more posting accounts, you can delete them using the

Account Maintenance window. If you’ve already entered transactions for the posting account, you can’t delete them using this procedure.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 79

P A R T 3

Setting up fiscal periods

See the General Ledger documentation for more information about posting.

To delete a posting account:

Open the Account Maintenance window.

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Account)

In the Account field, enter or select the account you want to delete.

Choose Delete to delete the account.

80 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 12: Fiscal periods

When you create a new company, default fiscal periods are created for you. This information explains how to verify the default fiscal periods and make changes, if necessary, or to create fiscal periods.

This information contains the following sections:

•

Fiscal period overview

•

•

Changing fiscal periods

Fiscal period overview

With Microsoft Dynamics GP, you can define up to 367 periods per year and you can have an unlimited number of years open at the same time. Each year can have a different number of periods and you can keep an unlimited number of historical years.

Beginning and ending dates

Microsoft Dynamics GP automatically calculates beginning dates for fiscal periods.

Be sure to verify these dates because they may not match the dates your business uses. You may want to make changes if the calculated day falls during a weekend, for example.

Three fiscal periods per fiscal year may have the same starting date. Extra periods are typically used for closing adjustments, auditors’ adjustments, and post-audit transactions.

When Microsoft Dynamics GP calculates fiscal periods, the last period may be longer than the rest. If the number of days in the year can’t be divided equally by the number of fiscal periods, the number of days per fiscal period is rounded down to the nearest day and any extra days are added to the last period. For example, if you enter 52 periods, periods 1 through 51 will have 7 days and the 52nd period will have 8 days.

If you change the number of periods or the dates of the fiscal year and choose Calculate, any previous changes you’ve made in the scrolling window will be deleted. To avoid reentering that information, be sure that your periods are calculated correctly before entering period names.

Fiscal periods for historical years

You can change the starting and ending dates for open or historical years; however, dates you enter can’t fall within the most recently closed historical year. The following table shows an example in which 2008 is the oldest open year and 2007 is the most recently closed year.

Year

2007

2008

First day

01/01/2007

01/01/2008

Last day

12/31/2007

12/31/2008

Status

Open

To change 2008’s beginning date from 01/01/2008 to 11/01/2007, you must change the ending date for 2007. The new beginning date of 2008 can’t fall within the closed year of 2007.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 81

P A R T 3

Tracing the audit trail

If you installed the default fiscal periods provided with Microsoft Dynamics GP, they’ll be displayed when you open the Fiscal Periods Setup window. You also can print a list of fiscal periods by choosing File >> Print when the Fiscal Periods Setup window is displayed.

Closed fiscal periods

In Microsoft Dynamics GP, you can’t post to a period that has been closed in the

Fiscal Periods Setup window. If it is necessary to post to a closed period, you can simply open the period in the Fiscal Periods Setup window and post the transaction. If a recent period was closed during a year-end closing process, you can still post to that period as long as the period isn’t closed in the Fiscal Periods Setup window. Once you’ve completed period-end procedures, you can prevent future posting to that period by closing it in the Fiscal Periods Setup window.

The Series Closed columns in the Fiscal Periods Setup window indicate whether an entire series is closed for the period or not. You can open or close each series individually in this window.

The Mass Close button in the Fiscal Periods Setup window opens the Mass Close

Fiscal Periods window, where you can select individual transaction origins and series. Using that window, you can open or close origins individually, or you can open or close all selected origins at once.

Setting up fiscal periods

If you didn’t install default data, use the Fiscal Periods Setup window to set up historical and current fiscal periods for your company. You also can use this procedure to set up fiscal periods for a new year. (You won’t be able to post transactions in a new year until you create fiscal periods for that year.)

To set up fiscal periods:

Open the Fiscal Periods Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Fiscal Periods)

Enter the year.

Enter the first day and last day of the fiscal year. The fiscal year can be any length; it isn’t limited to the length of a calendar year.

If you’re entering fiscal periods for a historical year, mark the Historical Year check box.

82 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 2 F I S C A L P E R I O D S

Enter the number of fiscal periods in the fiscal year. For example, if your fiscal periods are quarterly, enter 4; if they’re monthly, enter 12.

Choose Calculate to calculate each period’s first day and last day.

The beginning date of each period will appear in the scrolling window. You can reenter information and recalculate the periods as many times as necessary.

Using the Date column, review the beginning dates of periods and make changes if necessary.

Using the Period Name column, change the period names to names that reflect the needs of your business. For example, you might enter Ending 1/31/2007 or

Quarter 1 for Period 1.

Skip the Series Closed columns for now. You’ll use those columns later, as part of your period-end procedures, to prevent further posting to a series after a period has been closed.

Choose OK to save the fiscal period information you’ve entered and close the window.

Changing fiscal periods

You can make changes to your fiscal periods at any time using the Fiscal Periods

Setup window.

To change fiscal periods:

Open the Fiscal Periods Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Fiscal Periods)

Make your changes.

Choose OK to save your changes and close the Fiscal Periods Setup window.

Reconcile the General Ledger year using the Reconcile Financial Information window, if necessary.

• If you make changes to your fiscal periods before entering beginning balances, you don’t have to reconcile General Ledger.

•

Ι f you make changes to the dates of your fiscal periods after you’ve entered beginning balances, you must reconcile General Ledger for the appropriate year. Reconciling will ensure that all transactions are correctly assigned to the periods in which they were entered.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 83

84 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 13: Posting setup

Transactions form the basis of the financial information in your accounting system.

A transaction is a record of an event, such as a purchase or sale, that is ultimately reflected in an asset, liability, expense, revenue, or equity account. Entering a transaction in Microsoft Dynamics GP is similar to making a journal entry in a manual accounting system—you have a record of the information, but it’s not permanent.

Posting is the process that transfers the transaction amounts to your general ledger.

Getting the information there is important, because that’s the basis of your financial statements. However, it’s also important to be able to trace the amounts back to the original transaction, if necessary. That’s where source document codes and audit trail codes come in.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

•

Default source document codes

•

Printing a list of default source document codes

•

Setting up an additional source document code

•

Modifying a source document code

•

Audit trail codes

•

Printing a list of audit trail codes

•

Assigning source document codes to audit trail codes

•

Specifying which posting journals to reprint

•

Assigning default posting accounts

•

Selecting posting and reporting options

•

Batch control

•

Posting in detail from subsidiary ledgers

•

Posting “to” and “through” General Ledger

•

Specifying posting settings

•

About printing destinations

•

Specifying posting report options

Tracing the audit trail

The audit trail is a collection of records that allows you to trace a transaction from any point in the Microsoft Dynamics GP system back to the location where it was originally entered. With the information you’ve entered about the transactions, you should be able to trace them from their originating point in Microsoft Dynamics GP to the actual source documents—such as invoices, checks, or receipts—that provided the basis for the transactions.

When you trace the audit trail using posting journals, you’ll use two tools: source document codes and audit trail codes. These tools allow you to track a transaction to its origin by two separate paths:

• The source document code typically identifies the entry or document that serves as the basis for the transaction.

• The audit trail code identifies the posting journal the transaction appears on.

For more information about audit trail codes, see

Audit trail codes

on page 87.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 85

P A R T 3

Default source document codes

Source document codes are general in nature, and are useful for tracking the type of journal or entry you should examine for more information about a transaction. They don’t indicate which journal a given transaction appears on, however. Source document codes are particularly useful if you’re entering all transactions in General

Ledger because you can assign a source document code that identifies the type of transaction you’re entering. For example, you might use the source document code

GJ if the transaction represents a general journal entry. You’ll find that source document codes are more flexible, but may be less precise, than audit trail codes.

Microsoft Dynamics GP provides a limited number of commonly used source document codes, and you can set up additional codes using the Source Document

Setup window.

Source document codes typically indicate the type of document that the transactions first appeared on. The source document codes you enter in the Source

Document Setup window are used in two ways:

• You can assign source document codes to individual transactions entered in the

General Ledger transaction entry windows.

• You can assign source document codes to transaction origins using the Audit

Trail Code Setup window. Then, all transactions that are entered using the specified transaction origin are assigned the same source document code.

Printing a list of default source document codes

Before setting up additional source document codes or modifying source document codes, you should print the Source Document List.

To print a list of default source document codes:

Open the Source Document Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Posting >> Source Document)

Choose File >> Print or choose the printer icon button.

The Source Document List is printed, showing all the source document codes that have been set up. You also can print this report using the Company Setup

Report Options window.

Setting up an additional source document code

If you need source document codes in addition to those provided with Microsoft

Dynamics GP, set them up using the Source Document Setup window.

To set up an additional source document code:

Open the Source Document Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Posting >> Source Document)

86 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 3 P O S T I N G S E T U P

In the Source Document field, enter a source document code.

In the Description field, enter a description for the source document code.

Choose Save to save the source document code.

Modifying a source document code

You can change the description for existing source document codes at any time using the Source Document Setup window. To delete a source document code once it’s been assigned to an audit trail code, you must first remove the source document code from any origins it’s assigned to in the Audit Trail Codes Setup window.

To modify a source document code:

Open the Source Document Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Posting >> Source Document)

In the Source Document field, enter or select the source document code you want to change.

Make your changes.

Choose Save to save the source document code.

Audit trail codes

Audit trail codes provide a precise record of each transaction, including where it’s been posted as the transaction has made its way through the Microsoft Dynamics

GP system. Unlike source document codes, audit trail codes pinpoint the exact posting journal the transaction was included on. Using audit trail codes, you can trace transactions to their origins quickly and accurately.

Audit trail codes are made up of two components: the prefix and the journal number. The prefix indicates a particular type of posting journal, such as the

General Transaction Posting Journal, and the journal number indicates which specific journal, among all the General Transaction Posting Journals, that a transaction can be found on.

If a transaction was entered in a subsidiary module and posted through General

Ledger, it will have two audit trail codes associated with it, one for General Ledger and one for the originating module. For example, a Receivables Management sales transaction may be assigned codes of RMSLS00000214 when it is posted in

Receivables Management and GLTRX00000485 when it is posted in General Ledger.

Once the transaction reaches General Ledger, the Receivables Management audit trail code becomes the General Ledger batch ID. As a result, General Ledger posting journals will contain the audit trail codes for both postings—the one in General

Ledger and the one in Receivables Management.

If you were to refer to General Transaction Posting Journal number 485, you’d find the transaction, along with the audit trail code (now the batch ID) indicating that this transaction previously appeared on Sales Entry Posting Journal number 214. By cross-referencing the journals in this way, you can trace any transaction to its point of origin in Microsoft Dynamics GP. (You also could learn the customer’s purchase order number, and check number by clicking links, if you needed to trace the transaction beyond the transaction entry point.)

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 87

P A R T 3

To ensure the integrity of the audit trail, the audit trail codes provided with

Microsoft Dynamics GP can’t be changed, and you can’t create additional audit trail codes. However, you can change the number that will be assigned to the next posting journal of a particular type. You also can change the default source document code that’s assigned to a particular audit trail code.

Printing a list of audit trail codes

Before assigning source document codes to audit trail codes, you should print the

Audit Trail Codes List.

To print a list of audit trail codes:

Open the Audit Trail Codes Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Posting >> Audit Trail Codes)

Choose File >> Print.

The Audit Trail Codes List is printed, showing all the audit trail codes in

Microsoft Dynamics GP and the source document codes assigned to them. You also can print this report using the Company Setup Report Options window.

See Help >> Index >> Company Setup Report Options window for more information.

Assigning source document codes to audit trail codes

Audit trail codes are assigned to each transaction entry method and identify where specific transactions were entered.

To assign source document codes to audit trail codes:

Open the Audit Trail Codes Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Posting >> Audit Trail Codes)

Select a series.

Enter the number you want assigned to the next posting journal. (This number is the second half of the audit trail code.) This number is incremented by one each time you post transactions using the specified origin.

Identify a default source document code for each audit trail code. You can change the source document code for a given audit trail code at any time.

88 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 3 P O S T I N G S E T U P

To print a list of audit trail codes, choose File >> Print. The Audit Trail Codes

List is printed, showing information for the currently displayed series. You also can print this report using the Company Setup Report Options window.

Choose OK to save the audit trail codes and close the window.

Specifying which posting journals to reprint

Using the Audit Trail Codes Setup window, you can specify, by audit trail code, whether you want to be able to reprint posting journals. You may want to do this for one of the following reasons:

• As a safeguard against lost or misplaced posting journals.

• If you don’t want to print posting journals every time you post transactions.

If you mark the option to reprint posting journals, Microsoft Dynamics GP will retain more information about your transactions than if the option is unmarked.

Depending on your transaction volume, these historical records may take a great deal of hard disk space. If your hard disk space is limited, you may want to unmark the option to reprint posting journals.

History records are kept automatically for transactions and accounts if you choose to reprint posting reports. Refer to the documentation for each Microsoft Dynamics GP module for more information on keeping history.

To specify which posting journals to reprint:

Open the Audit Trail Codes Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Posting >> Audit Trail Codes)

Select a series.

Specify which posting journals can be reprinted, using one of the following techniques:

• Choose Mark All if you want the option of reprinting posting journals for all transaction origins within the selected series.

• Choose Unmark All if you don’t want to have the option to reprint posting journals for any transaction origins within the selected series.

• In the Reprint column, mark individual transaction origins that you want to be able to reprint and unmark the transaction origins you don’t want to be able to reprint.

To print a list of audit trail codes, which also shows the posting journal reprint options for each origin, choose File >> Print. The Audit Trail Codes List is printed, showing information for the series. You also can print this report using the Company.

Choose OK to save changes and close the Audit Trail Codes Setup window.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 89

P A R T 3

Setting up a posting account in Microsoft Dynamics GP

Assigning default posting accounts

To simplify data entry, it’s a good idea to set up a default posting account for every type of account that could be posted to when you post a batch or transaction. For instance, when you post a sales transaction, amounts may need to be posted to a cash account, an accounts receivable account, a cost of goods sold account, and so on. You’ll use the Posting Accounts Setup window to assign default posting accounts.

Once the accounts are set up, they appear as default entries in Microsoft Dynamics

GP transaction entry windows. You also can use the customer, item, or vendor maintenance window to enter posting accounts unique to each customer, item, or vendor. You’ll be able to override the default accounts if they’re not appropriate for a given transaction.

To assign default posting accounts:

Open the Posting Accounts Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Posting >> Posting Accounts)

From the Display list, select an individual series to assign default posting accounts for, or select All to display all posting accounts in the Posting Account column.

Place the pointer in the Accounts column of the row containing the posting account you want to assign an account for.

Enter an account, or select one from the lookup window. (To display the lookup window, choose the lookup button next to the Accounts heading.)

Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you’ve assigned default posting accounts for each account description in the scrolling window.

To print a Posting Accounts Report showing a list of the default posting accounts that have been assigned, choose File >> Print. You also can print this report using the Company Setup Report Options window.

Choose OK to save the information and close the window.

90 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 3 P O S T I N G S E T U P

Selecting posting and reporting options

A variety of posting and reporting options can be specified for each transaction origin in Microsoft Dynamics GP. The origin refers to the transaction entry window or method by which transactions are entered.

For each origin, you can choose whether to post transactions to General Ledger, or to post them through General Ledger to automatically update account balances in the chart of accounts.

You can specify how much or how little detail you want posted from an origin to General

Ledger. However, if you enter a batch and distribute the same debit and credit amount to the same posting account, you must create a journal entry for each transaction and post through

General Ledger in detail. If you posted the transaction in summary form, the transaction balance would be zero and posting in General Ledger wouldn’t be allowed.

You also can choose whether to print posting journals for each transaction origin.

We recommend that you choose to print these reports and store them with your company’s permanent records as part of the audit trail, but the choice is yours. For more information on using the audit trail in Microsoft Dynamics GP, refer to the

General Ledger documentation.

Batch control

You can choose to use batch controls to limit the batches that can be posted to only those that meet certain criteria. If you want to post only those batches that have a certain number of transactions, mark the Verify Number of Trx option. If you want to post only those batches whose totals equal a certain amount, mark the Verify

Batch Total option in the Posting Setup window. If you want to post only those batches that have been approved for posting, mark the Require Batch Approval option and enter the Approval Password.

Posting in detail from subsidiary ledgers

You can choose the level of detail that will be included when transactions are posted from subsidiary origins to General Ledge using the Create a Journal Entry Per options in the Posting Setup window.

If you want a separate journal entry created in General Ledger for each transaction, mark the Create a Journal Entry Per Transaction option.

If you want to create one journal entry in General Ledger for all the transactions in a batch, mark the Create a Journal Entry Per Batch option. If you select this option, you can select additional options to summarize the information:

• If you want transaction distributions to a particular account to be posted using the Level of Posting settings for each account (set in the Account Maintenance window), mark the Use Account Settings option. If the account is to be posted in detail, a separate distribution line item is created in General Ledger for each transaction that affects the account. If the account is to be posted in summary, a single distribution line item is created in General Ledger for all transaction amounts that affect the account. For more information, see

on page 78.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 91

P A R T 3

Posting “to” and “through” General Ledger

• If you want all transaction distributions to a particular account to be posted as a summarized total, do not mark the Use Account Settings option.

For the fastest performance when posting to General Ledger, select Create a Journal

Entry Per Batch and leave Use Account Settings unmarked.

Due to the additional processing required, the slowest performance option is Create a Journal Entry Per Batch with Use Account Settings marked. However, this option gives you the greatest control over the amount of detail that is provided in your

General Ledger.

Posting “to” and “through” General Ledger

The main difference between these posting options is that when you are posting to

General Ledger, you’ll have an extra opportunity to verify transactions before they affect your permanent records. When you are posting through General Ledger, you’ll save time by not completing the additional verification step.

Post to General Ledger

If you choose to post to General Ledger, batches posted in all other modules will update the module in which the transaction originated, then create a batch of General Ledger transactions. Then you must post those batches within General Ledger, as well, to update the posting accounts for the transactions.

If you decide not to mark the Post to General Ledger option, batches will be posted within the selected series only. You might want to unmark this option while entering beginning balances or while making adjustments within the series.

When you’re ready to begin posting routine transactions, be sure to return to the

Posting Setup window and mark the option if you want transactions to be available for posting in General Ledger.

Post Through General Ledger Files

You also can choose whether General

Ledger accounts will be updated automatically when you post from another module to General Ledger. If you mark the Post Through General Ledger Files option, batches posted in other modules automatically will update the module in which the transactions originated and the appropriate posting accounts in General

Ledger. Your transactions will post to General Ledger and not through General

Ledger when posting transaction individually (without a batch).

If you don’t mark the option, you’ll be able to edit the transactions again using

General Ledger’s Transaction Entry window before posting them to your permanent General Ledger records. However, if you edit amounts at this point, you must reconcile General Ledger’s year-to-date tables to ensure that posted amounts are identical. For more information on reconciling financial information, refer to the

General Ledger documentation.

Specifying posting settings

Use the Posting Setup window to determine how transactions are posted for each origin or transaction entry method within a particular Microsoft Dynamics GP series.

92 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 3 P O S T I N G S E T U P

To specify posting settings:

Open the Posting Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Posting >> Posting)

From the Series list, select a series.

From the Origin list, select a transaction origin. You can specify settings for each origin, or for all origins.

To specify how you want transactions from subsidiary modules posted to

General Ledger, make one of the following selections:

• Mark Post to General Ledger to transfer transactions from subsidiary modules to General Ledger when you post. You can verify the transactions in the General Ledger Transaction Entry window and you’ll have to post the batches in General Ledger before they update your account balances.

• Mark Post Through General Ledger Files to transfer transactions from subsidiary modules to General Ledger and automatically post them to your posting accounts.

• Leave both selections unmarked if you don’t want to post to General

Ledger. You might unmark these selections when you’re entering beginning balances or if you’re entering correcting transactions in a subsidiary module and don’t want the amounts to affect General Ledger.

For more information, refer to

on page 92.

If you’re posting to General Ledger, specify how detailed you want your journal entries to be. You can make the following selections:

• Create a journal entry per transaction to post in detail (to create a separate journal entry for each transaction). Select this option to have the most detailed information available.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 93

P A R T 3

Posting in detail from subsidiary ledgers

• Create a journal entry per batch and leave Use Account Settings unmarked to post in summary (to create a single journal entry for the batch total for each account). Select this option for the fastest posting.

• Create a journal entry per batch and mark Use Account Settings to post according to the specifications for each account. Select this option to get a mix of detail and summary information. (This option is the slowest of the three.)

• If you selected Payroll as the series, mark Post in Detail to have the most detailed information available.

Refer to

on page 91 for more information.

Mark Allow Transaction Posting to have the option of posting transactions individually from the selected transaction origin. Unmark this selection to require all transactions to be entered in a batch.

In the Posting Date From field, make one of the following selections if you selected Transaction in step 5:

• Mark Batch to post all transactions in the batch by the same date.

• Mark Transaction to post each transaction by the transaction’s posting date.

Mark Include Multicurrency Info if you’re using Multicurrency Management.

Posting journals printed as part of the posting process will include multicurrency information; reprinted posting journals won’t include multicurrency information even if this option is marked.

In the If Existing Batch field, make one of the following selections to specify what happens if you post additional transactions from the same source and the first batch still exists in General Ledger:

• Mark Append to add the transactions to the existing batch.

• Mark Create New to create a new batch.

10. Specify options for posting reports. For more information, see

Specifying posting report options

on page 95.

Choose Save to save the posting setup information.

About printing destinations

You can select any combination of the following printing destinations for posting journals and other audit reports.

Printer

The report is printed to the default printer specified in your computer’s printer setup.

Screen

The report appears on the screen and you can then choose to print to the printer. In addition, if you’re using an e-mail system that’s compatible with MAPI

(Messaging Application Programming Interface) or Exchange, you can mail any

Microsoft Dynamics GP report that you print to the screen.

94 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 3 P O S T I N G S E T U P

File

The report is saved as a file. You can specify the following:

• The report file name and location.

• One of the file formats described below.

• Whether you want to replace an existing copy of the report file each time you print it, or append the new report to the end of the existing file.

The file formats you can select when you print a report to a file are listed in the following table:

File format

Tab-delimited

Comma-delimited

Text

HTML

XML Data

Adobe PDF

Word Document

Description

The tab-separated ASCII character format used by spreadsheet programs, such as Microsoft Excel.

The standard comma-separated ASCII character format used by database programs.

Text with no formatting. Use this option only if the application you’ll use to read the report can’t read any other format.

A format that can be views in a web browser.

A text file that contains an XML representation of the report layout and all the report data. Choose this format if you want to process the report using an external application.

This format is available if you have the PDFWriter printer driver installed (included with Acrobat 5 and earlier), or Acrobat Distiller from Acrobat 6 or later. PDF (Portable Document Format) files can be read using Adobe Reader software available from Adobe.

The Microsoft Office Open XML (.docx) file format used by Word 2007 or later. You can select this format if you select Template as the report type.

Specifying posting report options

By default, Microsoft Dynamics GP automatically prints posting reports. If you don’t want to print the reports, or if you want to select different destinations for the reports, you can change them using the Posting Setup window.

To specify posting report options:

Open the Posting Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Posting >> Posting)

From the Series list, select a series.

From the Origin list, select a transaction origin.

In the Print column of the Reports scrolling window, unmark any reports you don’t want to print.

• To unmark all reports that are currently displayed in the scrolling window, choose Unmark All.

• To mark all reports in the scrolling window, choose Mark All.

In the Send To column, specify one or more destinations for the reports you want to print.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 95

P A R T 3

Setting up a shipping method

If you selected File as one of the options in step 5, make the following selections:

• In the Type column, select a file format.

• In the Append/Replace column, select what to do if the report file already exists.

• In the Path column, enter the location and the file name for the report file.

To print the Posting Settings Report, showing the posting and reporting options for the selected series and origin, choose File >> Print. You also can print this report for all series and origins for the current company using the Company

Setup Report Options window.

Choose Save to save the posting report options.

96 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 14: Shipping methods and payment terms

When you create a new company, you have the option to load default shipping methods and payment terms. You also can set up additional shipping methods and payment terms, or make changes to existing ones.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Shipping methods

•

•

Payment terms

•

Setting up payment terms

•

Setting up payment terms with discounts

•

Taxes calculations for New Zealand payment terms with discounts

Shipping methods

A shipping method is one of many ways that goods are transported to your company from your vendors, and from you to your customers. You can use the same shipping methods for your vendors and your customers.

A shipping type indicates whether the goods are delivered by the vendor or picked up by the customer. The shipping type is used when calculating taxes. See

Part 4,

Tax setup

, for more information.

If you installed the default shipping methods provided with Microsoft Dynamics

GP when you created the company you’re setting up, they’ll appear when you open the Shipping Methods Setup window and you choose the Shipping Method lookup button. You also can print a list of shipping methods by choosing File >> Print in the

Shipping Methods Setup window.

Setting up a shipping method

If you didn’t load default shipping methods, or if you need additional shipping methods, use the Shipping Methods Setup window to create them. If several carriers routinely provide the same type of shipping service, set up a unique shipping method name for each carrier.

If, after beginning to use your system, you need to update or remove any of the shipping methods, you can do so. Existing transactions that used the shipping methods won’t be affected by the changes.

To set up a shipping method:

Open the Shipping Methods Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Shipping Methods)

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 97

P A R T 3

Enter a shipping method and description.

Select either pickup or delivery as the shipping type.

• Select Pickup if the purchaser picks up the goods.

• Select Delivery if the goods must be delivered by the seller, a shipping company, or by mail.

Enter the name of the carrier providing the shipping method.

Enter the account number assigned to your company by the carrier.

Enter the name of the person you speak or deal with most often, and the phone number where the contact person can be reached.

Choose Save to save the shipping method information.

Payment terms

Payment terms outline the terms under which a vendor expects payment from a customer. In Microsoft Dynamics GP, you’ll work with payment terms that your company extends to customers, and also with payment terms that vendors extend to your company.

The following table displays common payment terms and descriptions.

Invoice

Date

Payment Terms Discount

Days

Discount

Date

Percent

Discount

Due

Date

11/30 2%-10/Net 30 10 2.00% 12/30

The customer is offered a 2% discount in return for payment within 10 days after the purchase, or invoice date. The payment is due in full 30 days after the invoice date.

11/30 2%-10th/Net 30 12/10 2.00% 1/09

The customer is offered a 2% discount in return for making payment by the 10th of the month following the month in which the invoice date occurred. Since the invoice date is in November, the “10th” referenced in the payment terms would be the 10th of December. The payment is due in full 30 days after the discount date. If the invoice is generated in one of the first 9 days of the month, the discount is available only until the 10th of the month in which the invoice occurred.

11/30 2%-15th/EOM 12/15 2.00% 12/30

The customer is offered a 2% discount in return for payment by the 15th of the month. Since the invoice date is November 30th, the discount date is the 15th of the following month. If the invoice date were December 5th or 10th, the discount date still would be December 15th. The payment is due in full at the end of the same month as the discount date.

11/30 Net 30 days

The payment is due in full 30 days after the invoice date.

12/30

Setting up payment terms

If you chose to install the default payment terms provided with the accounting system when you created the company you’re setting up, they’ll appear when you open the Payment Terms Setup window and choose the Payment Terms lookup button. You also can print a Payment Terms Report by choosing File >> Print in the

Payment Terms Setup window.

98 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 4 S H I P P I N G M E T H O D S A N D P A Y M E N T T E R M S

If you didn’t load default payment terms, or if you need additional payment terms, use the Payment Terms Setup window to create them. Use the following procedure to set up payment terms that don’t include a discount.

If, after beginning to use your accounting system, you need to update or remove any of the payment terms, you can do so at any time. Existing transactions using the payment terms won’t be affected by the changes.

For payment terms that use a date or the end of month (EOM) payment terms, you can specify a grace period for each customer to whom you’re offering Date/EOM payment terms, or for each vendor from whom you’re receiving those terms.

• To specify a grace period for customers, use the Customer Maintenance window. See the Receivables Management documentation for more information.

• To specify a grace period for vendors, use the Vendor Maintenance Options window. See the Payables Management documentation for more information.

To set up payment terms:

Open the Payment Terms Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Payment Terms)

Enter the name of the payment terms, such as Net 30 or EOM.

From the Due list, select when the full amount of the payment is due.

• If the payment is due within a certain number of days after the invoice date, select Net Days and enter the number of days.

• If the payment is due by a given date, select Date and enter a date. For example, assume that you enter 10 as the date. If an invoice has an invoice date is 11/12/2017, the payment is due on 12/10/2017, the 10th day of the next month.

• If the payment is due in full by the end of the month in which the invoice date occurs, select EOM.

• If the payment is due on the 20th of the month following the document date, select Next Month.

Choose Save to save the payment terms.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 99

P A R T 3

From the Due list, select when the full amount of the payment is due. See

Setting up payment terms with discounts

Use the Payment Terms Setup window to set up payment terms that include a discount. You can calculate the discount percentage on the entire payment, or on any of the amounts that typically appear on an invoice: tax, freight, and so on. You can choose any combination of these amounts, depending on what you allow customers to discount, or what you are allowed to discount.

To set up payment terms with discounts:

Open the Payment Terms Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Payment Terms)

Enter the name of the payment terms, such as 2%-10/Net 30.

Setting up payment terms

on page 98 for more information.

From the Discount list, select when the payment must be made for the customer to receive a discount.

• If a discount is given if payment is made within a certain number of days after the invoice date, select Days and enter the number of days.

• If a discount is given if payment is made by a certain date following the invoice date, select Date and enter the date. For example, assume that you enter 10 as the date. If an invoice has an invoice date is 11/12/2017, the discount expires on 12/10/2017, the 10th day of the next month.

• If the discount is given if payment is made by the end of the month in which the invoice date occurs, select EOM.

In the Discount Type field, select whether to base the discount on a percentage of the total amount or a fixed currency amount.

• If you select Percent, enter a percentage for the discount.

• If you select Amount, enter a currency amount for the discount.

In the Calculate Discount On list, select the amounts that the discount applies to.

Choose Save to save the payment terms.

100 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 4 S H I P P I N G M E T H O D S A N D P A Y M E N T T E R M S

Taxes calculations for New Zealand payment terms with discounts

Assume a debtor has a payment terms discount of 2%/10 Net 30, and makes a $100 purchase.

• If the debtor doesn’t pay the invoice within 10 days (the discount period), the following amount is charged:

Sale amount

GST amount

Total

$100.00

$12.50

$112.50

• To calculate taxes correctly for this situation in Microsoft Dynamics GP, the

Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes box in the Company Setup Options window must be unmarked.

• If the debtor pays the invoice within 10 days, the debtor is eligible for a 2% discount, and the total sale would be as shown:

Sale amount

GST amount

Total

$100.00 - 2% discount =

$12.50 - 2% discount =

$98.00

$12.25

$110.25

• To calculate taxes correctly for this situation in Microsoft Dynamics GP, the

Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes box in the Company Setup Options window must be marked.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 101

102 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 15: Financial information

Use this information to set up currencies, bank records, and checkbooks for each company. This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Setting up currencies

•

Setting up a currency record

•

Setting company access to a currency

•

Specifying functional and reporting currencies

•

Checking links for currency tables

•

Setting up a bank record

•

Using checkbooks throughout Microsoft Dynamics GP

•

Check numbers and deposit numbers

•

Inactive checkbooks

•

Last reconciled date and last reconciled balance

•

Setting up a checkbook

•

Setting up payables options for a checkbook

•

Setting up a credit card

Setting up currencies

Currency records track information about how the currency will be used in

Microsoft Dynamics GP, as well as how it appears in windows and on reports.

Currency records are used throughout the Microsoft Dynamics GP system; once a currency record is set up, you can set access to it for multiple companies, if needed.

• The functional currency is the currency in which a company maintains its financial records.

• The reporting currency is used to convert financial currency amounts to another currency on inquiries and reports.

You must set up a functional currency, even if you’re not using Multicurrency

Management.

To set up currencies, you’ll need to complete the following procedures:

• Set up one or more currency records.

• Set access to the currency for your company.

• Specify functional and reporting currencies.

• Check links to ensure that related tables are updated.

If you’ve loaded the sample company, you can use its currency records in your own company.

Setting up a currency record

Currency records are used throughout the Microsoft Dynamics GP system; once a currency record is set up using the Currency Setup window, you can set access to it for multiple companies, if needed.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 103

P A R T 3

To set up a currency record:

Open the Currency Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Currency)

In the Currency ID field, enter or select a name for the currency.

In the Description, ISO code, and Symbol fields, enter the information that’s appropriate for the currency.

Select additional display and separator options and enter payables check terminology.

Choose Save to save the currency information.

Setting company access to a currency

Once a currency record is set up using the Multicurrency Access Setup window, you can set access to it for multiple companies, if needed.

To set company access to a currency:

Open the Multicurrency Access Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Multicurrency Access)

From the Currencies list, select the currency to which you want to set access.

104 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 5 F I N A N C I A L I N F O R M A T I O N

In the Access column, mark the box for each company that uses this currency.

Choose OK to save your entries and close the window.

Specifying functional and reporting currencies

Use the Multicurrency Setup window to specify functional and reporting currencies for each company. The functional currency is the primary currency that the company uses for maintaining accounting records. The reporting currency is used to convert functional currency amounts to another currency on inquiries and reports. For a subsidiary, the reporting currency typically is the functional currency of the parent company.

To specify functional and reporting currencies:

Open the Multicurrency Setup window.

(Financial >> Setup >> Financial >> Multicurrency)

In the Functional Currency field, enter the currency that your business uses most often. Typically, this is the currency of the country in which your organization is located.

In the Reporting Currency field, enter the currency that your organization uses for reporting. (optional)

Enter the exchange rate and rate calculation method to be used when calculating the reporting currency. If no reporting currency was entered, these fields will be disabled.

You can mark the Override Reporting Rate option if you would like the user to override the reporting currency exchange rate or rate calculation method on inquiries and reports. You also can enter a password if you want the password to be required when overriding the rate and calculation method.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 105

P A R T 3

In each of the Default Transaction Rate Types fields, enter or select a rate type.

If you’re not using Multicurrency Management, make the following selections:

Field

Financial

Sales

Purchasing

Selection

AVERAGE

Choose OK to save your changes and close the window.

When you choose OK, a message may instruct you to check links on the

Multicurrency Setup table. For example, if you have changed the functional currency, the message will appear.

Checking links for currency tables

Use the Check Links window to check relationships among tables to find information that may be missing from one table within the relationship. To verify that all updated multicurrency information is present, you’ll need to add the

Multicurrency Setup table into your list of tables to check links for.

To check links for currency tables:

Open the Check Links window.

(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Maintenance >> Check Links)

In the Series list, be sure that Financial is displayed.

In the Logical Tables list, select Multicurrency Setup and choose Insert to insert it into the Selected Tables list.

Choose OK to check links.

Setting up a bank record

A bank is a financial institution with which you do business. You’ll use the Bank

Maintenance window to set up bank records.

If you do business with a bank at more than one location, you can set up separate bank IDs for each of the bank branches. For example, if you do business with Metro

Bank at both its Main office and its Park Avenue office, you could set up Metro

Bank1 and Metro Bank2 as bank IDs and enter Main and Park Avenue as the bank branches.

106 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 5 F I N A N C I A L I N F O R M A T I O N

To set up a bank record:

Open the Bank Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Bank)

Enter a bank ID and name.

Enter the bank’s address information, including phone and fax numbers. If you’re using Bank Reconciliation, this information can be formatted to be printed on deposit slips.

Enter the bank’s transit number. This is the first group of numbers (usually followed by a colon) in the lower left corner on checks issued by the bank.

Enter the bank branch to further identify this bank ID.

Choose Save to save the bank information.

To print a Bank List containing information for the currently selected bank, choose File >> Print. You also can print this report using the Company Setup

Report Options window.

Using checkbooks throughout Microsoft Dynamics GP

Use checkbooks to maintain records of deposits, checks, or cash paid out. Later, you can reconcile this information with the statement of activity provided by your bank.

You can set up an unlimited number of checkbooks to manage your company’s cash. For example, one checkbook can be set up for writing payroll checks, another for making payments to vendors, and a third for recording miscellaneous payments made by your business.

If you add Bank Reconciliation after you’ve begun using Microsoft Dynamics GP, it’s a good idea to set up completely new checkbook IDs. This way, transactions that were entered in other modules won’t need to be posted before using Bank

Reconciliation.

If you’re moving checkbooks to Microsoft Dynamics GP from another accounting system, see Chapter 1, “Setup preparation,” in the Bank Reconciliation documentation.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 107

P A R T 3

The Cash Account From option in each of the following windows specifies whether to use the cash account from the checkbook assigned to a transaction or the cash account assigned to the customer, employee, or vendor.

• Customer Class Accounts Setup

• Customer Account Maintenance

• Vendor Class Accounts Setup

• Vendor Account Maintenance

• Employee Maintenance

• Employee Class Setup

If you’re using Bank Reconciliation, be sure to use the cash account from the checkbook to ensure that your checkbook balances can be easily reconciled.

Check numbers and deposit numbers

Check and deposit numbers can be alphanumeric. If alphabetic characters are entered, the numerals—not the letters—will increment as you process checks and enter deposits.

By defining the next number, you’re also determining the number of unique numbers that will be available. For example, if you enter CK001 as the next check number, you’ll only be able to enter up to 999 unique checks. Be sure to enter a number large enough to accommodate your business.

If alphabetic characters are entered between numbers, only the numbers to the right of the last letter you’ve entered will increment. For example, if the next check number is CK00M18888, the following check number will be CK00M18889.

Inactive checkbooks

You can inactivate a checkbook at any time. For example, if you plan to close a checking account in the near future and you don’t want to write new checks or add receipts to this checkbook before you reconcile, you could inactivate the checkbook to prevent any new checks or receipts from being entered for that checkbook.

When a checkbook is inactive, you can perform the following functions for the checkbook:

• Post transactions that were entered in any module.

• Void receipts, transactions or deposits in any module except Payroll. (You can’t void checks in Payroll.)

• Enter Deposits With Receipts or Deposits To Clear Receipts transactions using the Bank Deposit Entry window.

• Enter adjustment transactions using the Reconcile Bank Adjustments window.

• Adjust the checkbook balance to zero using the Reconcile Bank Statements window.

108 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 5 F I N A N C I A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Last reconciled date and last reconciled balance

For new checkbooks, the last reconciled balance is the checkbook’s current balance.

You can make changes to this amount until you’ve reconciled the checkbook for the first time. If you change the last reconciled balance after saving the checkbook, you’ll need to enter an adjustment in General Ledger for the Cash account, because an adjusting entry won’t be made automatically.

After you reconcile a checkbook, the amount in the Last Reconciled Balance field is the same as the bank statement’s ending balance in the Reconcile Bank Statements window. This amount can’t be changed in the Checkbook Maintenance window.

Setting up a checkbook

Use the Checkbook Maintenance window to set up a new checkbooks.

To set up a checkbook:

Open the Checkbook Maintenance window.

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Checkbook)

Enter a checkbook ID and description.

Enter a currency ID, payment rate type ID, and deposit rate type ID.

Enter the Cash account to which this checkbook’s transactions will be posted.

It’s best to set up a separate Cash account for each checkbook. That way, you’ll have a separate record of each checkbook’s activity in General Ledger. The checkbook Cash account must be a posting account—it can’t be either a unit account or an allocation account if a unit account is assigned as one of the distributions.

Enter the number of the next check and deposit transaction that will be issued from or entered in this checkbook. Each time you enter a check or deposit, the number is incremented by one to the next available number.

Select the address ID of the company location that uses this checkbook. This information appears on the Bank Deposit Worksheet when you print that report.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 109

P A R T 3

Enter checkbook information. See

Enter the checkbook account number at the bank where the checking account is located. Then, select the ID of the bank where this checkbook account is located.

Enter the date and balance from the last time you reconciled this checkbook.

This information can be changed, if necessary, until you reconcile the checkbook the first time.

Enter user-defined information. The entry you make in the first user-defined field can be used as a sorting option when printing reports such as the

Checkbook List.

10. Choose Save to save the checkbook information you’ve entered.

11. To print a checkbook list containing information for the currently displayed checkbook, choose File >> Print. You also can print this report using the

Checkbook Report Options window.

Setting up payables options for a checkbook

For greater control, you can specify additional Payables Management options within the Checkbook Maintenance window for checkbooks that are used to pay vendors. You can control the following options:

• Maximum check amount

• Allow duplicate check numbers or not

• Allow default check numbers to be changed or not

To set up payables options for a checkbook:

Open the Checkbook Maintenance window.

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Checkbook)

Setting up a checkbook

on page 109.

In the Maximum Payables Check Amount field, enter the largest amount a check from this checkbook can be written for. If you don’t want to set a limit, leave the amount at $0.00; no maximum will apply.

In the Maximum Payables Check Password, enter a password to allow checks to be written for more than the maximum, if the password is entered.

To use a check number more than once when entering payments, printing checks or posting checks in Payables Management for this checkbook, mark the

Duplicate Check Numbers option.

To change the check number when entering payables transactions and payments, mark the Override Check Number option.

Choose Save to save the checkbook information you’ve entered.

Setting up a credit card

With Microsoft Dynamics GP, you can track information about credit cards that are accepted from customers and cards that are used by your company. The same card can be used for both purposes.

110 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 5 F I N A N C I A L I N F O R M A T I O N

Use the Credit Card Setup window to set up information about each of the credit cards that your company uses.

If, after beginning to use your accounting system, you need to update or remove any of the credit cards, you may do so at any time. Existing transactions that were paid using the credit cards won’t be affected by the changes.

Credit cards and check cards

Both credit cards and check cards can be used by your company to purchase goods and services. The difference lies in where the amounts will be posted for transactions involving these cards.

• Credit cards require that you specify a vendor ID for the credit card company.

Payments made with credit cards are treated as accounts payable amounts. The credit card company acts as a vendor to you in this instance, since you’ll pay them for the goods and services you purchase with the card.

• Check cards require that you enter a checkbook ID. Payments made with check cards are treated as check or cash payments, because the amount is automatically withdrawn from your bank account. Banks issue a variety of check cards. The checkbook ID is the checkbook in which payments with the card should be tracked.

Bank cards and charge cards

Both bank cards and charge cards can be accepted from customers. The difference lies in where the amounts will be posted for transactions involving these cards.

• Bank cards require that you specify a checkbook ID. Payments with bank cards are treated as check or cash payments. The checkbook ID identifies the checkbook in which you will track payments made with this card.

• Charge cards require that you enter a posting account. Payments made with charge cards are treated as accounts receivable amounts. They must be submitted to the credit card company and the reimbursement received before the payment is considered received.

To set up a credit card:

Open the Credit Card Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Credit Cards)

Enter the name of any credit card your business accepts from customers or uses to make payments.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 111

P A R T 3

E-mail overview for documents

If the card name you entered is one you accept in payment from customers, mark Accepted from Customers. Then do one of the following:

• If the card is a bank card, mark Bank Card and enter a checkbook ID.

• If the card is a charge card, mark Charge Card and enter a posting account.

If the card is used by your company to make payments, mark Used by

Company. Then do one of the following:

• If the credit card company bills you monthly for purchases made, mark

Credit Card and enter a vendor ID for the credit card company.

• If the card is a check card, mark Check Card and enter a checkbook ID.

Choose Save to save the credit card information.

To print a Credit Card Report showing information for the currently displayed credit card, choose File >> Print. You also can print this report using the

Company Setup Report Options window.

112 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 16: E-mail setup for documents

Use this information to set up the e-mail functionality for documents in Microsoft

Dynamics GP. For information about sending reports in e-mail, see Report Writer reports in your System Users Guide (Help >> Contents >> select Using The System)

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

•

E-mail requirements for documents

•

E-mail setup for documents checklist

•

Setting up e-mail document options for a company

•

Setting up messages for e-mail documents

•

Customizing a message with additional fields

•

Copying an existing email message to a new message

•

Setting up e-mail options for sales documents

•

Setting up e-mail options for multiple customers

•

Setting up e-mail options for purchasing documents

•

Setting up e-mail options for multiple vendors

E-mail overview for documents

By using the e-mail functionality for documents in Microsoft Dynamics GP, you can embed document into the body of an e-mail or send documents as attachment. You can send a single document, batches of documents, or multiple documents from sales and purchasing transaction lists. When setting up the e-mail functionality, you can select which documents to send and which customers and vendors should receive their documents in e-mail. If you are using Word templates for Microsoft

Dynamics GP, you can send predefined or customized forms. For more information, see

Chapter 42, “Word templates.”

You can send the following documents in e-mail.

Documents

Sales quote

Sales order

Sales fulfillment order

Sales invoice

Sales return

Sales back order

Packing slip

Receivables invoice

Receivables return

Receivables debit memo

Receivables credit memo

Receivables finance charges

Receivables service/repair

Receivables warranty

Customer statement

Standard purchase order

Blanket purchase order

Drop-ship purchase order

Drop-ship blanket purchase order

Vendor remittances

You can embed documents into the body of the e-mail or send documents as attachment. A document can be sent in an HTML, XPS, PDF, or DOCX file format type. Multiple documents can be combined in a single e-mail.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 113

E-mail requirements for documents

You also can create predefined messages to send to your customers and vendors.

These messages can be assigned to the documents that you want to send in e-mail so all customers or vendors receive the same message for selected documents. For example, you can send a promotional message to your customers when sending sales quotes in e-mail. You also can assign a specific message to an individual customer or vendor. For example, you can send a holiday greeting message to a vendor. When you create a message, you can enter an alternate e-mail address so your customer or vendor can reply to a specific e-mail address.

You also can customize your messages by adding fields that are associated with a document type. For example, a message can be personalized to address each customer or vendor by name. You could add the due date for a sales invoice in a message or the on order amount for a purchase order.

E-mail requirements for documents

Review the following requirements.

• You can send documents by email if you’re using a MAPI-compliant e-mail service or Exchange 2007 Service Pack 1 or greater with Exchange Web Services.

• If you are using Exchange 2007 Service Pack 1 or greater with Exchange Web

Services, the Autodiscover service must be turned on to connect to the

Exchange server.

• The e-mail functionality in Microsoft Dynamics GP supports the following document types. Depending on the document type, Microsoft Word 2010 or later and Word templates for Microsoft Dynamics GP are required.

File format Word 2010 or later Word templates Web Client

XPS

PDF

DOCX

HTML

Required for MAPI

Not required

Enabled

Not required

Not available

Available*

*Email for Microsoft Dynamics GP Web Client will only be available if Exchange is your server type in the System Preferences window.

• Before you can send documents as DOCX, PDF, or XPS attachments, the Word template for the document must be enabled in the Template Configuration

Manager window.

• The email functionality is supported on the 32-bit edition of Microsoft Office

2010.

• The email functionality is supported on the 64-bit edition of Microsoft Office

2010 is supported, if you are using Exchange 2007 Service Pack 1 or greater with

Exchange Web Services.

114 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 6 E - M A I L S E T U P F O R D O C U M E N T S

Depending on the file format you choose to send your documents in e-mail, your customers and vendors must be using the following components to view their documents.

File format Component

XPS

PDF

Microsoft XPS Viewer

Adobe Reader

DOCX

HTML

Microsoft Word Viewer

Internet Explorer 9

Internet Explorer 8

*If you are using Microsoft Dynamics GP Web Client only, your customers and vendors must be using HTML to view their documents

E-mail setup for documents checklist

Use this checklist as your guide when setting up the e-mail functionality in

Microsoft Dynamics GP.

Step For more information

1. Verify e-mail requirements.

2. Set up e-mail options for your company.

on page 114

Setting up e-mail document options for a company

on page 115

3. Set up predefined messages for your customers and vendors.

4. Set up your documents to be sent in e-mail.

Setting up messages for e-mail documents

on page 116

Setting up e-mail options for sales documents

on page 119

Setting up e-mail options for purchasing documents

on page 121

5. Set up e-mail options for your customers and vendors.

Setting up e-mail options for multiple customers

on page 120

To set up an individual customer, see the Receivables Management documentation.

Setting up e-mail options for multiple vendors

on page 122

To set up an individual customer, see the Payables Management documentation.

6. Enter To, Cc, and Bcc e-mail addresses to send documents in e-mail in the Internet Information window for your customers and vendors.

See Entering Internet information in your System Users Guide (Help >>

Contents >> select Using The System).

Setting up e-mail document options for a company

Use the Company E-mail Setup window to select options to use when sending documents in e-mail. You can select to embed documents, attach documents, or both. If you select to send documents as attachments, you can specify which type of file formats you want to attach the documents as. The options you select in this window are available for customer and vendor records.

If you selected to use an option, such as the DOCX file format, and then decide not to use the option, you must update the customer and vendor records that were set up to use the DOCX file format.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 115

Setting up e-mail options for sales documents

To set up e-mail document options for a company:

Open the Company E-mail Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> E-mail Settings)

Mark whether to embed documents into the body of e-mail messages.

Mark whether to send documents as attachments in e-mail messages.

If you are attaching documents in messages, select the formats to send the documents in.

Before you can send documents as DOCX, PDF, or XPS attachments, the Word template for the document must be enabled in the Template Configuration

Manager window. Standard reports (reports generated by Report Writer) are sent when you send documents as HTML attachments.

Choose one of the following options.

• Choose OK to save your changes and close the window.

• Click the Sales Series link to open the Sales E-mail Setup window. See

on page 119 for more information.

• Click the Purchasing Series link to open the Purchasing E-mail Setup

window. See

Setting up e-mail options for purchasing documents

on page 121

for more information.

Setting up messages for e-mail documents

Use the Message Setup window to create messages that you can send to customers or vendors when sending documents in e-mail. Messages can be predefined on a company-wide basis, and used on Sales Order Processing, Receivables

Management, or Purchase Order Processing documents, or Payables Management remittances.

Messages can be assigned to the documents that you want to send in e-mail so all customers or vendors receive the same message for selected documents. For example, you can send a promotional message to your customers when sending sales quotes in e-mail. You also can assign a specific message to an individual customer or vendor. For example, you can send a holiday greeting message to a vendor. When you create a message, you can enter an alternate e-mail address so your customer or vendor can reply to a specific e-mail address.

116 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 6 E - M A I L S E T U P F O R D O C U M E N T S

To set up messages for e-mail documents:

Open the Message Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> E-mail Message Setup)

Enter an ID to identify the message.

Enter a description of the message ID.

Select the series in which you want this message to appear. Messages assigned to All can be used with both the Sales and Purchasing series.

Select a document type from the series you selected. This field isn’t available if you selected All as the series.

Enter a subject line for the message. If you don’t enter a subject for the message, the document number of the transaction you are sending is used.

You also customize the subject line by adding a field or fields associated with a

document type. See

Customizing a message with additional fields

on page 118 for

more information.

Enter the message that will appear in the e-mail when sending documents.

You also customize the message by adding a field or fields associated with a

document type. See

Customizing a message with additional fields

on page 118 for

more information.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 117

Enter or select an address that a customer or vendor can use to send a reply to a specific e-mail address. For example, assume that you have entered [email protected] as the reply to address. If you send a document in e-mail to a vendor, the vendor receives e-mail from [email protected]. When the vendor replies to the e-mail, [email protected] is used in the To field.

The default reply to address is the address displayed in the Sales E-mail Setup window or the Purchasing E-mail Setup window.

Choose Validate to verify the field or fields you added to the message body or subject line match the document type assigned to the message.

10. Choose Save to save the message ID.

Customizing a message with additional fields

You customize the subject or message body by adding a field or fields associated with a document type from the series you selected. For example, a message can be personalized to address each customer or vendor by name. You also could add a tracking number in the message for a sales invoice or a PO number and promised date in a message for a purchase order.

To customize a message with additional fields:

Enter an ID to identify the message.

Select Sales or Purchasing as the series in which you want this message to appear.

Select a document type from the series you selected.

Place the cursor in the Subject field or in the message body.

From the Field field, select an additional field.

Choose Insert.

To customize a message with additional fields using the right-click menu:

Enter an ID to identify the message.

Select Sales or Purchasing as the series in which you want this message to appear.

Select a document type from the series you selected.

Place the cursor in the Subject field or in the message body.

Right-click in the body or subject of a message ID and select Insert.

In the Insert window, select the field or fields you want to add.

Choose OK.

118 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 6 E - M A I L S E T U P F O R D O C U M E N T S

Copying an existing email message to a new message

When you create a new message, you can copy the message information, except for the document type, from an existing message ID to a new message ID. For example, if you created a message ID for a receivables invoice, you can copy message information from the existing message ID from a sales invoice.

To copy an existing email message to a new message:

Open the Company E-mail Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> E-mail Message Setup)

Enter a new message ID.

Choose the Copy button.

In the Copy Email Message window, select the message ID you want to copy security information from.

Choose OK.

The Copy Email Message window closes and the message information is copied to the new message ID displayed in the Message Setup window. The document type from the existing message ID is not copied to the new message ID.

Setting up e-mail options for sales documents

Use the Sales E-mail Setup window to mark which sales documents can be sent in e-mail and select a default message ID for each of those documents. You also can enter an e-mail address where customers can send replies to and select options to change the reply to address and change the message when you enter a sales document. The options you select in this window are available when you set up or modify e-mail options for your customer records.

To set up e-mail options for sales documents:

Open the Company E-mail Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> E-mail Settings)

Click the Sales Series link to open the Sales E-mail Setup window.

Mark the documents you want to send in e-mail to your customers. If a document is unmarked, it can’t be sent in e-mail. To select all documents, mark the Enable option.

Enter or select the message ID you want to send for each document type you want to send in e-mail. A message ID isn’t required when sending documents in e-mail.

Enter or select an address that a customer can use to send a reply e-mail for the document type. The address you enter in this field is the default reply to address if you created a new message for the sales series.

Mark to change the address used as a reply to address when entering a sales document. If you mark this option, you can edit the message in the Sales E-mail

Detail Entry window or the Receivables E-mail Detail Entry window.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 119

about updating multiple customer records with e-mail options, see

Mark to change the e-mail message when entering the sales document. You can edit the message in the Sales E-mail Detail Entry window or the Receivables Email Detail Entry window.

If you don’t mark this option, you wont be able to edit the subject and message body of the Sales E-mail Detail Entry window or the Receivables E-mail Detail

Entry window.

Choose OK to save your changes or choose the Customer Setup button to update multiple customer records with e-mail options. For more information

Setting up email options for multiple customers

on page 120.

Setting up e-mail options for multiple customers

Use the Mass Customer E-mail Settings window to assign e-mail settings to multiple customers. You can select which documents you want to send to the customers. You also can specify message IDs and the document format to use for the vendor. A message ID is a predefined message that you can assign to a document that you want to send in e-mail. For example, you can send a promotional message to your customers when sending sales quotes in e-mail.

If you want to set up an individual customer, you can use the Customer E-mail

Options window. For more information, see the Receivables Management documentation.

To set up e-mail options for multiple customers:

In the navigation pane, choose the Sales button, and then choose the Customers list.

Mark the customers you want to set up e-mail options for.

In the Modify group or its overflow menu, and then select E-mail Settings to open the Mass Customer E-mail Settings window.

Select to send documents as attachments or embed documents in the message body. The options available depend on your selections in the Company E-mail

Setup window.

If you are sending documents as attachments, you can mark to send multiple attachments for documents of the same document type with the same subject, message body, address to send replies to, To, Cc, and Bcc address in one e-mail.

If you are sending documents as attachments, mark to set a maximum file size limit for attached documents sent to the customers and enter the file size. If this field is unmarked, there isn’t a size limit.

Mark the documents you want to send in e-mail. If a document is unmarked, it can’t be sent in e-mail. The documents available to send depend on the documents you selected in the Sales E-mail Setup window. To select all documents, mark the Enable option.

120 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 6 E - M A I L S E T U P F O R D O C U M E N T S

Enter or select the message ID to use with the document type. If you didn’t select a message ID for the document type in the Sales E-mail Setup window, the Message ID field is blank. A message ID isn’t required when sending documents in e-mail.

Select the file format to send the documents in as attachments. The files formats available to send attachments depend on the formats you selected in the

Company E-mail Setup window.

Before you can send documents as DOCX, PDF, or XPS attachments, the Word template for the document must be enabled in the Template Configuration

Manager window. Standard reports (reports generated by the Report Writer) are sent when you send documents as HTML attachments.

10. Choose OK to update the selected customers with the options you entered.

Setting up e-mail options for purchasing documents

Use the Purchasing E-mail Setup window to mark which purchasing documents can be sent in e-mail and select a default message ID for those documents. You also can select an e-mail where vendors can send replies to and select options to change the reply to address and the message when you enter a purchasing document. The options you select in this window are available when you set up or modify e-mail options for vendor records.

To set up e-mail options for purchasing documents:

Open the Company E-mail Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> E-mail Settings)

Click the Purchasing Series link to open the Purchasing E-mail Setup window.

Mark the documents you want to send in e-mail. If a document is unmarked, it can’t be sent in e-mail. To select all documents, mark the Enable option.

Enter or select the message ID you want to send for each document type you want to send in e-mail. A message ID isn’t required when sending documents in e-mail.

Enter or select an address that a vendor can use to send a reply e-mail for the document type. The address you enter in this field is the default reply to address if you created a new message for the purchasing series.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 121

Setting up e-mail options for multiple vendors

Mark to change the address used as a reply to address when entering a purchase order. If you mark this option, you can edit the message in the

Purchasing E-mail Detail Entry window.

Mark to change the e-mail message when entering the purchasing document.

You can edit the message in the Purchasing E-mail Detail Entry window.

If you don’t mark this option, you wont be able to edit the subject and message body of the Purchasing E-mail Detail Entry window.

Choose OK to save your changes or choose the Vendor Setup button to update multiple vendor records with e-mail options. For more information about updating multiple vendor records with e-mail options, see

on page 122.

Setting up e-mail options for multiple vendors

Use the Mass Vendor E-mail Settings window to assign e-mail settings to multiple vendors. You can select which documents you want to send to the vendors. You also can specify message IDs and the document format to use for the vendors. A message ID is a predefined message that you can assign to a document that you want to send in e-mail. For example, you can send a promotional message to your vendors when sending purchase orders in e-mail.

You can either send documents as attachments or embed documents in the message body. If you send documents as attachments, you can select to send multiple attachments to the vendors and set the maximum file size of the document.

If you want to set up an individual vendor, you can use the Vendor E-mail Options window. For more information, see the Payables Management documentation.

To set up e-mail options for multiple vendors:

In the navigation pane, choose the Purchasing button, and then choose the

Vendors list.

Mark the vendors you want to set up e-mail options for.

In the Modify group or its overflow menu, and then select E-mail Settings to open the Mass Vendor E-mail Settings window.

122 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 6 E - M A I L S E T U P F O R D O C U M E N T S

Select to send documents as attachments or embed documents in the message body. The options available depend on your selections in the Company E-mail

Setup window.

If you are sending documents as attachments, mark to set a maximum file size limit for attached documents sent to the vendors and enter the file size. If this field is unmarked, there isn’t a size limit.

Mark the documents you want to send in e-mail. If a document is unmarked, it can’t be sent in e-mail. The documents available to send depend on the documents you selected in the Purchasing E-mail Setup window. To select all documents, mark the Enable option.

Enter or select the message ID to use with the document type. If you didn’t select a message ID for the document type in the Purchasing E-mail Setup window, the Message ID field is blank. A message ID isn’t required when sending documents in e-mail.

Mark the file format or formats to send the documents in as attachments. The files formats available to send attachments depend on the formats you selected in the Company E-mail Setup window.

Before you can send documents as DOCX, PDF, or XPS attachments, the Word template for the document must be enabled in the Template Configuration

Manager window. Standard reports (reports generated by the Report Writer) are sent when you send documents as HTML attachments.

10. Choose OK to update the selected vendors with the options you entered.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 123

124 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 17: Document attachment setup

Use this information to set up the document attachment functionality in Microsoft

Dynamics GP.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Document attachment overview

•

Setting up document attachment options

Document attachment overview

By using the document attachment functionality in Microsoft Dynamics GP, you attach documents such as requisitions, credit reports and images to master records,

Sales Order Processing transactions and Purchase Order Processing transactions.

You can attach documents to individual line items on transactions.

You can flow or roll down attachments from master records to transactions. For example, you can attach directions to a vendor’s location to the vendor record. If you are rolling down attachments for the vendor record, the directions are attached to each purchase order that the vendor is assigned to.

You also can define attachment attributes to further describe the attachment. For example, you could enter Image as a user-defined label for an attachment in the

Document Attachment Setup window and then enter a description of the image in the Attachment Properties window after attaching the image to an item record.

If you are using the email functionality for documents in Microsoft Dynamics GP, you can select attachments to send in email when you send the purchase order or sales document in email.

You can attach documents to the following master records.

Master records

Item record

Customer record

Vendor record

You can attach documents to the following documents and transactions. You also can attach documents to the line items assigned to the documents and transactions.

Transactions

Sales quote

Sales order

Sales fulfillment order

Sales invoice

Sales return

Sales back order

Standard purchase order

Blanket purchase order

Drop-ship purchase order

Drop-ship blanket purchase order

Shipment receipt

Purchasing Invoice receipt

In-transit transfer receipt

Purchasing return

Purchasing return/credit

Purchasing inventory

Purchasing inventory w/Credit

Payables invoice

Payables finance charge

Payables return

Payables miscellaneous charge

Payables credit memo

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 125

Tracking Intrastat statistics for a company

Transactions

Shipment/Invoice receipt

Setting up document attachment options

Use the Document Attachment Setup window to select options for attaching documents.

To set document attachment options:

Open the Document Attachment Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Document Attachment Setup)

Mark to attach documents to transactions, transaction line items, and master records.

Enter or select the default location.

Mark to delete the file from the default location after attaching a document to a transaction or master record.

Enter the maximum file size limit for attached documents.

Mark to delete attachments from master records and transactions in the

Document Attachment Management window. If you don’t mark this option, you cannot delete attachments from master records and transactions.

Assign a password that will be required to use when deleting attachments. If this field is blank, no password is required to delete an attachment.

Mark to allow attachments to flow or roll down from a customer record to a transaction.

Mark Flow or Not Flow as the default type when entering attachments for the customer records. You can use the Attachment Properties window to change the type after entering attachments. If you mark Not Flow, the attachment assigned to the customer record will not roll down to the transactions entered for the customer.

126 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 7 D O C U M E N T A T T A C H M E N T S E T U P

10. Mark to allow attachments to flow or roll down from an item record to a transaction.

11. Mark Flow or Not Flow as the default type when entering attachments for the item records. You can use the Attachment Properties window to change the type after entering attachments. If you mark Not Flow, the attachment assigned to the item record will not roll down to the transactions that the item is assigned to.

12. Mark to allow attachments to flow or link from a vendor record to a transaction.

13. Mark Flow or Not Flow as the default type when entering attachments for the vendor records. You can use the Attachment Properties window to change the type after entering attachments. If you mark Not Flow, the attachment assigned to the vendor record will not roll down to the transactions entered for the vendor.

14. Mark to send attachments in email. By marking this option, the Mark Send

Attachments in Email option is available in the Attachment Properties window.

If you are using the email functionality in Microsoft Dynamics GP, you can select attachments to send in email when you send purchase order or sales document in email.

15. Enter labels for user-defined attribute fields for attachments. The labels you enter here will appear in the Attachment Properties window, and you can enter information about the label in the field. For example, you might enter Picture as the label in this window and then enter a description of the picture in the

Attachment Properties window.

You can select a default attribute label.

16. Choose OK to save your changes and close the window.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 127

128 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 18: Intrastat setup

Intrastat is the system for collecting statistics on the trade of goods between

European Union (EU) countries. Intrastat data is required for all items either bought from EU vendors or sold to EU customers, and must be provided on a monthly basis. Requirements for Intrastat are similar in all EU countries. The government uses these statistics as an economic indicator.

The entries you make will be used to create the Intrastat Trade Report you submit to your government, and the EC Sales List, which displays cumulative goods value totals by each vendor or customer Tax Registration number.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

•

Setting up country codes

•

Setting up transport mode codes

•

Setting up transaction natures

•

Setting up incoterms codes

•

Setting up procedure/regime codes

•

Setting up port codes

•

Setting up region codes

•

Setting up country of origin codes

•

Setting up tax commodity codes

Tracking Intrastat statistics for a company

Use the Company Setup Options window to enable a company to track Intrastat trade statistics.

The options in this procedure may have been marked automatically, depending on the country or region you chose when you installed Microsoft Dynamics GP.

To track Intrastat statistics for a company:

Open the Company Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company)

Enter or select a company.

Choose the Options button to open the Company Setup Options window.

Mark Enable Intrastat Tracking to make Intrastat entry windows available. If you don’t mark this option, you won’t be able to enter Intrastat information for transactions, vendors, or customers.

Choose OK to close the Company Setup Options window.

Choose OK in the Company Setup window to save your changes.

Setting up country codes

Use the Country Code Maintenance window to set up country codes.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 129

P A R T 3

These codes are used when you prepare the Intrastat Trade statistics reports for each item sold to a customer or purchased from a vendor located in an EU member state.

The following are examples of country codes:

Country code

Country

Belgium

Germany

Denmark

Greece

Spain

France

United Kingdom

Ireland

Italy

Luxembourg

Netherlands

Portugal

Turkey

To set up country codes:

Open the Country Code Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Country Codes)

The Country Code Maintenance window will be available only if you have marked to enable Intrastat tracking in the Company Setup Options window.

Enter a country code and indicate whether this country is an EU member.

Enter a description for this country code.

Save your changes and continue entering country codes.

Setting up transport mode codes

Use the Transport Mode Maintenance window to set up transport mode codes identifying all the shipping methods you use to transport goods to EU member states or to receive goods from EU member states.

130 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 8 I N T R A S T A T S E T U P

These codes are used when you prepare the Intrastat Trade statistics reports for each item sold to a customer or purchased from a vendor located in an EU member state.

You may wish to refer to the transport mode codes defined by your government.

The following are examples of transport mode codes:

Transport mode code

Transport mode

Sea Freight

Rail Freight

Road Freight

Air Freight

Post

Fixed Transport Installations

Inland Waterway

Own Propulsion

To set up transport mode codes:

Open the Transport Mode Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Transport Mode Codes)

The Transport Mode Maintenance window will be available only if you have marked to enable Intrastat tracking in the Company Setup Options window.

Enter a transport mode code.

Enter a description for this transport mode code.

Save your changes and continue entering transport mode codes.

Setting up transaction natures

Use the Transaction Nature Maintenance window to set up transaction natures for the types of transactions you usually enter for EU vendors or customers.

These codes are used when you prepare the Intrastat Trade statistics reports for each item sold to a customer or purchased from a vendor located in an EU member state.

You may wish to refer to the transaction nature codes defined by your government.

The following are examples of transaction natures:

Transaction nature code

Transaction nature

Sale of Goods/Services Invoice

Sale of Goods/Services Credit

Return Goods/Services Invoice

Return Goods/Services Credit

Free of Charge Supply Invoice

Free of Charge Supply Credit

Goods for Processing or Repair

Move Goods/No Change of Owner

Other Transactions

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 131

P A R T 3

To set up transaction natures:

Open the Transaction Nature Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Transaction Nature Codes)

The Transaction Nature Maintenance window will be available only if you have marked to enable Intrastat tracking in the Company Setup Options window.

Enter a transaction nature.

Enter a description for this transaction nature.

Save your changes and continue entering transaction natures.

Setting up incoterms codes

Use the Incoterms Maintenance window to set up incoterms codes that are used to determine the point at which responsibility for the goods will change from the exporter to the importer. Incoterms stands for International Commercial Terms and are maintained by the International Chamber of Commerce.

These codes are used when you prepare the Intrastat Trade statistics reports for each item sold to a customer or purchased from a vendor from an EU member state. The following list provides examples of incoterms codes:

Incoterms code

CIF

DDU

EXW

FOB

Delivery method

Cost, Insurance and Freight

Delivered Duty Unpaid

Ex-Works

Free on Board

To set up incoterms codes:

Open the Incoterms Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Incoterms)

The Incoterms Maintenance window will be available only if you have marked to enable

Intrastat tracking in the Company Setup Options window.

Enter a incoterms code.

Enter a description for this incoterms code.

Save your changes and continue entering incoterms codes.

Setting up procedure/regime codes

Use the Procedure/Regime Maintenance window to set up procedure/regime codes.

These codes are used when you prepare the Intrastat Trade statistics reports for each item sold to a customer or purchased from a vendor from an EU member state. You may wish to refer to the transaction nature codes defined by your government.

132 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 8 I N T R A S T A T S E T U P

To set up procedure/regime codes:

Open the Procedure/Regime Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Procedure/Regime)

The Procedure/Regime Maintenance window will be available only if you have marked to enable Intrastat tracking in the Company Setup Options window.

Enter a procedure/regime code.

Enter a description for this procedure/regime code.

Save your changes and continue entering process type codes.

Setting up port codes

Use the Port Maintenance window to track the goods port of entry for a purchase and the port of exit for a sale

To set up port codes:

Open the Port Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Port)

The Port Maintenance window will be available only if you have marked to enable

Intrastat tracking in the Company Setup Options window.

Enter a port code.

Enter a description for this port code.

Save your changes and continue entering port codes.

Setting up region codes

Use the Region Maintenance window to track from which region the goods originated for a purchase and the region of destination for a sale.

To set up region codes:

Open the Region Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Region)

The Region Maintenance window will be available only if you have marked to enable

Intrastat tracking in the Company Setup Options window.

Enter a region code.

Enter a description for this region code.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 133

P A R T 3

Chapter 19, “International taxes,” provides an overview of some tax features

Save your changes and continue entering region codes.

Setting up country of origin codes

Use the Country of Origin Maintenance window to track the country the goods originated in.

To set up country of origin codes:

Open the Country of Origin Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Country of Origin)

The Country of Origin Maintenance window will be available only if you have marked to enable Intrastat tracking in the Company Setup Options window.

Enter a country of origin code.

Enter a description for this country of origin code.

Save your changes and continue entering country of origin codes.

Setting up tax commodity codes

Use the Tax Commodity Code Maintenance window to set up tax commodity codes for products or services you either sell or purchase. Commodity codes for goods and services are defined in the EU Combined Nomenclature.

To set up tax commodity codes:

Open the Tax Commodity Code Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Tax Commodity Codes)

The Tax Commodity Code Maintenance window will be available only if you have marked to enable Intrastat tracking in the Company Setup Options window.

Enter a tax commodity code.

Enter a description for this tax commodity code.

Save your changes and continue entering tax commodity codes.

134 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Part 4: Tax setup

This part of the documentation contains information about tracking taxes on sales and purchases in Microsoft Dynamics GP. For information about payroll taxes, refer to the Payroll documentation.

For additional information about tax setup windows, refer to the help. (From the

Help menu, choose Index; then type the name of the window and choose Display.)

The following information is discussed:

•

and special setup information for different areas of the world.

•

Chapter 20, “Value-added tax,” explains how to set up information needed to

correctly process Value-added Taxes (VAT).

•

Chapter 21, “Tax overview,” provides an introduction to tax calculation and tax

schedules in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

•

Chapter 22, “Tax details,” explains how to use the Tax Detail Maintenance

window to add, change, or delete tax details.

•

Chapter 23, “Tax schedules,”

describes how to set up tax schedules used to calculate all the taxes that apply to a sales or purchase transaction.

136 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 19: International taxes

Microsoft Dynamics GP accommodates the different tax rates on goods and services in cities, states, provinces, regions, and countries in many areas of the world. These taxation methods include goods and services tax (GST), Provincial Sales Tax (PST),

Québec Sales Tax (QST), Value-added Tax (VAT), and Pay As You Go (Withholding), as well as taxes calculated as a percent of sale or purchase.

This information provides an overview of some features and special setup information for different areas of the world.

Review the sections listed below that apply to countries in which you do business and complete any preliminary setup tasks that are necessary. Then, continue to

Chapter 21, “Tax overview,” to set up taxes.

•

Default tax options

•

Setting up taxes in the United States

•

Setting up taxes in Canada

•

Setting up company GST information for Canada

•

Canadian tax detail option

•

Setting up taxes in New Zealand

•

Setting up company GST information for New Zealand

•

Setting up taxes for Europe and the United Kingdom

Default tax options

Use the Company Setup Options window to select tax options for your company.

Depending on the country or region you chose during the installation of your

Microsoft Dynamics GP product, some of the options in this window may be marked as default entries. For more information about the tax options, see the documentation for the Company Setup Options window. The following table displays the options that are marked for each country/region.

Country/region

Africa

Australia

Belgium

Canada

Colombia

Default tax options

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Enter VAT Return

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculations

Use Shipping Method when Selecting Default Tax Schedule

Enable GST for Australia

Enter Tax Date

Use Shipping Method when Selecting Default Tax Schedule

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes

Enable Reverse Charge Taxes

Enter VAT Return

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculations

Allow Summary-Level Tax Edits

Use Shipping Method when Selecting Default Tax Schedule

Allow Summary-Level Tax Edits

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Use Shipping Method when Selecting Default Tax Schedule

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 137

P A R T 4

Country/region

Czech Republic

France

Germany

Hong Kong SAR

Luxembourg

Near East

Netherlands

New Zealand

Portugal

Poland

Singapore

United Kingdom

United Sates

Default tax options

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Enter VAT Return

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount,

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculations

Enable Reverse Charge Taxes

Calculate Tax Rebates

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Enter VAT Return

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculations

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes

Enter VAT Return

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculations

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes

Enter VAT Return

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculations

Allow Summary-Level Tax Edits

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Use Shipping Method when Selecting Default Tax Schedule

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes

Enter VAT Return

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculations

Enter Tax Date

Use Shipping Method when Selecting Default Tax Schedule

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes

Enter VAT Return

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculations

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Enter VAT Return

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculations

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes

Enter Tax Date

Enter VAT Return

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculations

Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

Enter Tax Date

Enter VAT Return

Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculations

Allow Summary-Level Tax Edits

Use Shipping Method when Selecting Default Tax Schedule

138 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 9 I N T E R N A T I O N A L T A X E S

Setting up taxes in the United States

The United States has varying state and local tax rates and calculation bases. Tax can be calculated on sales and purchases.

In the United States, most states have a sales tax, and many cities and counties assess additional taxes. Tax rates for different types of goods and services vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. Certain goods may be subject to a “luxury tax,” as well.

Not-for-profit organizations and certain businesses may qualify for exemptions from some taxes; check with your taxing authority for more information.

In most jurisdictions in the United States, taxes are not assessed on other taxes;

“taxable taxes” in Microsoft Dynamics GP are most commonly used outside the

United States.

• If you do business exclusively in the United States, you can set up all your tax information using the Tax Detail Maintenance and Tax Schedule Maintenance windows.

• If you do business outside the United States, set up additional tax information using the Company Setup window. Then enter tax details and tax schedules for taxes in all countries and regions in which you do business.

To set up taxes in the United States:

Open the Company Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company)

Enter your federal taxpayer identification number (TIN) in the Tax Registration field.

Choose OK to save your changes.

When you’ve finished entering tax details and tax schedules, be sure to return to the

Company Setup window and specify the default sales and purchases tax schedules for the company.

Setting up taxes in Canada

Canada has a federal Goods and Services Tax (GST) that applies to every province and territory in Canada. Generally, GST is collected on all supplies and services.

However, the following conditions may apply:

• An Exempt tax rate and a 0% tax rate may apply to certain goods. Exempt supplies should be assigned a 0% tax detail as the rate and no tax should be collected. Generally, sales of exempt supplies are tracked and reported, but can’t be claimed as Input Tax Credit.

• Zero-rated supplies are taxable, but taxed at a rate of 0% and can be claimed as

Input Tax Credit. As a result, no tax is applied to the sale of these goods, but information is available for input tax credit purposes when you complete the

GST returns.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 139

P A R T 4

difference is remitted to the taxation authority in each country. See Chapter 20,

Provincial Sales Tax (PST) is collected at different rates throughout Canada. Each province also determines whether the GST is taxable by the PST. Québec Sales Tax

(QST) is the provincial sales tax in Québec. QST is taxed at two rates, one for products and another for services.

• Enter tax exempt and tax registration information using the Company Setup window.

• To set up GST, PST, and QST taxes, use the Tax Detail Maintenance and Tax

Schedule Maintenance windows.

Setting up company GST information for Canada

You’ll use the Company Setup window to enter company GST information.

To set up company GST information for Canada:

Open the Company Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company)

Enter your tax exemption numbers in the Tax Exempt fields.

Enter your company’s GST registration number in the Tax Registration field.

Choose OK to save your changes.

When you’ve finished entering tax details and tax schedules, be sure to return to the

Company Setup window and specify the default sales and purchases tax schedules for the company.

Canadian tax detail option

Mark the Enable Canadian Tax Detail option in the Company Setup Options window (Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company >> Options button) to do the following things:

• Select the account that taxes calculated posts to when a you have selected a purchase tax detail type.

• Select to post the tax detail to either the account on the tax detail, or the purchases account associated with the vendor, or the inventory account from the item on the purchase order/shipment order receipt.

• View sales and purchases transactions with the taxes included in the amounts if you have marked Inclusive of Tax on the View menu (View >> Inclusive of Tax).

Setting up taxes in New Zealand

New Zealand uses a federal Goods and Services Tax (GST); it also has a system of handling payment terms discounts.

When a customer pays an invoice within the time that a discount is allowed, the discount is taken on the GST amount, as well as the amount of the sale.

• Enter company GST information using the Company Setup window.

140 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 1 9 I N T E R N A T I O N A L T A X E S

• To set up federal and state taxes, use the Tax Detail Maintenance and Tax

Schedule Maintenance windows.

Setting up company GST information for New Zealand

You’ll set up company GST information for New Zealand by choosing the appropriate option in the Company Setup Options window.

To set up company GST information for New Zealand:

Open the Company Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company)

Enter your company’s GST registration number in the Tax Registration field.

Choose Options to open the Company Setup Options window

Mark the Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes option to indicate how your company typically pays invoices that include a terms discount. Marking this selection will result in taxes being applied only to the discounted amount, regardless of when the payment is actually made.

• If you typically pay invoices that include a terms discount before the discount expires, mark this option. On occasions where you don’t pay before the discount expires, you’ll need to adjust the tax amounts manually.

• If you typically don’t pay invoices before their discounts expire, leave this option unmarked. On occasions where you do pay before the discount expires, you’ll need to adjust the tax amounts manually.

Choose OK to save your changes.

When you’ve finished entering tax details and tax schedules, be sure to return to the

Company Setup window and specify the default sales and purchases tax schedules for the company.

Setting up taxes for Europe and the United Kingdom

Value-Added Tax (VAT) is a general tax used throughout Europe and elsewhere in the world. Each country that uses VAT has its own rate of taxation and often has different rates for various goods or special zones within the country. VAT is collected on sales, and any credit for tax paid on purchases is also tracked. The

“Value-added tax,” for more information on VAT.

• Set up company VAT information using the Company Setup window.

• Enter a zero percent tax detail for receivables and payables documents that are automatically generated within the system when the Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount option is marked in the Company Setup Options window. This tax detail will be used when refunding a check, consolidating vendors and customers, assessing finance charges, and handling non-sufficient funds.

• Set up taxes using the Tax Detail Maintenance and Tax Schedule Maintenance windows.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 141

P A R T 4

Value-added tax overview

• To enter VAT information for each of your debtors, use the Debtor Maintenance

Options window when you’re setting up debtor information.

• To enter VAT information for each of your creditors, use the Creditor

Maintenance Options window when you’re setting up creditor information.

142 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 20: Value-added tax

Value-added Tax (VAT) is an input tax due on purchases and an output tax due on sales. It is used throughout Europe and elsewhere in the world. This information explains how to set up information needed to correctly process VAT data.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

•

Setting up VAT for a company

•

Setting up VAT details and schedules

•

Entering VAT information for debtors and creditors

Value-added tax overview

Microsoft Dynamics GP accommodates the different tax rates on goods and services sold in cities, states, provinces, regions, and countries in many areas of the world.

These taxation methods include VAT. VAT is an input tax due on purchases and an output tax due on sales. It is used throughout Europe and elsewhere in the world.

Each country that uses VAT has its own rate of taxation and often has different rates for various goods or special zones within the country. VAT is collected on sales, and any credit for tax paid on purchases also is tracked. The difference is remitted to the taxation authority in each country.

VAT entries will be used to compile the Detail Tax Report or the Summary Tax

Report, which displays the total sale or purchase amount, the total tax amount, the total EU sale or purchase amount and the total EU tax.

Setting up VAT for a company

Use the Company Setup window and the Company Setup Options window to set up company VAT information.The following options in the Company Setup

Options window will be marked automatically for you:

• Calculate Taxes in General Ledger

• Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount

• Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculation

Be sure to enter a registration number for each company you set up. The options in this procedure may have been marked automatically, depending on the country or region you chose when you installed Microsoft Dynamics GP.

To set up VAT for a company:

Open the Company Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company)

Enter your company’s VAT registration number in the Tax Registration field.

Choose the Options button to open the Company Setup Options window.

Mark the Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes option. Marking this selection will result in taxes being applied only to the discounted amount, regardless of when the payment is actually made.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 143

P A R T 4

Chapter 22, “Tax details” and

Mark the Enable VAT Return option.

Enter a zero percent tax detail for receivables and payables documents that are automatically generated within the system when the Require Tax Detail Totals to Match the Pre-Tax Amount option is marked. This tax detail will be used when refunding a check, consolidating vendors and customers, assessing finance charges, and handling non-sufficient funds.

Choose OK to close the Company Setup Options window.

Choose OK in the Company Setup window to save your changes.

Setting up VAT details and schedules

Use the Tax Detail Maintenance window and the Tax Schedule Maintenance window to set up tax details and schedules. For more information about tax details and schedules, see

Chapter 23, “Tax schedules.”

When you set up a tax detail, you’ll define the basis that will be used to calculate the tax, the maximum or minimum amount that will be taxed, and the account that will be used to track input or output tax amounts. Once you’ve set up tax details, you can create tax schedules. Tax schedules are groups of tax details that will be assigned to a transaction.

Input and output taxes usually are included in the item price or based on a percentage of the sale or purchase amount, but Microsoft Dynamics GP supports all methods of calculation.

Entering VAT information for debtors and creditors

Before using Microsoft Dynamics GP to calculate input and output taxes, you must enter tax registration information for your debtors and creditors. For more information about debtors and creditors, refer to the Receivables Management and

Payables Management documentation.

• To enter VAT information for each of your debtors, use the Debtor Maintenance

Options window when you’re setting up debtor information.

• To enter VAT information for each of your creditors, use the Creditor

Maintenance Options window when you’re setting up creditor information.

144 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 21: Tax overview

This information contains an introduction to tax calculation and tax schedules in

Microsoft Dynamics GP. You’ll complete two procedures to set up your taxes; setting up tax details and setting up tax schedules.

For additional information about tax setup windows, refer to the help. (From the

Help menu, choose Index; then type the name of the window and choose Display.)

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Before you enter tax details and schedules

•

Overview of Microsoft Dynamics GP taxes

•

Why tax schedules are used

•

How taxes are calculated

•

Default tax schedules

•

Freight and miscellaneous charge tax calculations

•

Withholding taxes

Before you enter tax details and schedules

Complete the following tasks before you begin entering tax details and schedules:

• Enter a chart of accounts. For information on entering accounts, refer to the

General Ledger documentation, or to

Setting up a posting account in Microsoft

Dynamics GP

on page 78 if you’re not using General Ledger.

• Set up shipping methods if you’ve marked the Use Shipping Method when

Selecting Default Tax Schedule option in the Company Setup Options window.

Taxes are calculated based on the point of exchange, using the shipping method assigned to a transaction to determine the point of exchange. Refer to

Setting up a shipping method

on page 97.

• Complete international setup procedures. Review the information and complete the preliminary setup procedures that apply to each country or region in which you do business.

Overview of Microsoft Dynamics GP taxes

You’ll complete two procedures to set up your taxes; setting up tax details and setting up tax schedules. At the most basic level, the difference between tax details and tax schedules is this:

Tax details

Tax details identify specific taxes, their rate of taxation and the taxing authority to whom taxes must be paid.

Tax schedules

Tax schedules provide a method of grouping the tax details that apply to companies, items, customers, or vendors.

For example, if you’re setting up sales taxes for your business in Seattle,

Washington, you’ll need to set up details for each Washington state tax and each

Seattle city tax. After all the details have been defined, you can group the details for

Washington and those for Seattle into a schedule. This schedule can be assigned to all the customers, vendors, and items that are subject to Seattle and Washington taxes.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 145

P A R T 4

When you enter transactions in Microsoft Dynamics GP, you don’t need to select all the tax details that apply to the transaction; once you’ve set up tax schedules,

Microsoft Dynamics GP calculates all applicable taxes automatically.

Why tax schedules are used

Consider the following example:

• A business is located in the same taxing jurisdiction as all its customers and vendors.

• All the goods and services the business provides or purchases are taxed at the same rate.

• There’s only one taxing authority to remit taxes to.

In this case, every transaction has exactly the same rate of taxation and the business can set up one tax detail. It also must set up at least one tax schedule; when entering transactions in Microsoft Dynamics GP, the business’s clerk selects the tax schedule, rather than a tax detail.

Chances are that your organization operates in a more complex taxing situation than the previous example. Your situation is probably similar to the following example:

• Your organization and at least some of your customers and vendors are subject to different tax jurisdictions.

• Different goods and services are taxed at different rates, and the rates are different for different tax jurisdictions.

• There are multiple taxing authorities to remit taxes to.

Tax schedules are used to simplify the process of assigning all applicable details to each company, item, customer, and vendor. These default schedules are used to calculate taxes automatically when you enter a transaction. If you don’t specify a default tax schedule, you can select one as you’re entering the transaction.

How taxes are calculated

When the system calculates tax on a sale or purchase, it compares the tax schedule assigned to the customer or vendor, as well as the tax schedule assigned to the sale or purchase and any freight and miscellaneous charges. The system checks for details that match between the customer or vendor and the sale or purchase amounts. Taxes are calculated only for the details that match.

If you change the shipping method for a transaction, taxes are automatically recalculated. When the shipping method is pickup, the tax schedule for the vendor is compared to the tax schedules for the items. When the shipping method is delivery, the tax schedule for the customer is compared to the tax schedules for the items.

146 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 1 T A X O V E R V I E W

Item

Shirt (Clothing)

Radio (General)

Milk (Food)

Item

Shirt (Clothing)

Radio (General)

Chocolate (Food)

Different tax rates for different items

Consider the following example:

A retail store is selling three items to a customer:

• A shirt at US$20.00

• A portable radio at US$50.00

• A liter of milk at US$1.00

The store is located in a town that is subject to 1.0% city tax and a 5.0% state tax.

However, clothing and food are not taxable in either jurisdiction. Because the customer is purchasing the items at a retail store, the exchange of goods happens in the store’s jurisdiction, not the customer’s. To calculate the taxes, Microsoft

Dynamics GP compares the tax schedules that are assigned to each item with the tax schedules assigned to the store and calculates taxes only for the details that appear for both.

Tax details in the tax schedule assigned to the:

Item Store Customer

5% State

1% City

5% State

1% City

5% State

1% City

5% State

Calculated tax

US$0 because the shirt isn’t taxable.

US$3.00 because the tax schedules for both the item and the store contain the same tax details.

US$0 because the milk isn’t taxable.

5% State

1% City

5% State

Different tax rates for different customers

Consider the following example:

A mail-order distributor is selling three items to a customer:

• A shirt at US$20.00

• A portable radio at US$50.00

• A box of chocolates at US$10.00

The distributor is located in a town that is subject to 1.0% city tax and a 5.0% state tax. The customer is located in another town, where no city taxes apply. Clothing and food are not taxable in either jurisdiction. Because the items are being shipped to the customer, the exchange of goods happens in the customer’s jurisdiction, not the distributor’s. To calculate the taxes, Microsoft Dynamics GP compares the tax schedules that are assigned to each item with the tax schedule assigned to the customer and calculates taxes only for the details that appear for both.

Tax details in the tax schedule assigned to the:

Item

5% State

1% City

Store

5% State

1% City

5% State

1% City

5% State

1% City

Customer

5% State

Calculated tax

US$0 because the shirt isn’t taxable.

US$2.50 because only the state tax applies to both the item and the customer.

US$0 because the chocolate isn’t taxable.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 147

P A R T 4

If you’ve marked the Use Shipping Method when Selecting Default Tax Schedule option in the Company Setup Options window, Microsoft Dynamics GP uses the shipping method assigned to the transaction to determine where the exchange of goods takes place, and provides the appropriate tax schedule as a default schedule for the transaction.

Series

Sales

Purchasing

Shipping method’s shipping type

Pickup

Delivery

Pickup

Delivery

Default tax schedules

Default tax schedule comes from

Your company

Customer

Vendor

Your company

Default tax schedules for freight and miscellaneous charges are set up by module; not by customer or vendor.

Receivables Management and Payables Management

Default tax schedules for sales or purchases, freight, and miscellaneous charges can be set up in the Receivables Setup Options window for sales taxes and in the Payables Setup

Options window for purchase taxes.

Sales Order Processing and Invoicing

Default tax schedules for noninventoried items, freight, and miscellaneous charges can be set up in the Sales

Order Processing Setup Options window and in the Invoicing Setup Options window. In these modules, you also have the option of basing the taxes for noninventoried items, freight, and miscellaneous charges on the customer. If you select that option, the customer’s tax schedule is used for the tax calculations. For more information, see the Sales Order Processing and Invoicing documentation.

Purchase Order Processing

Default tax schedules for non-inventoried items, freight, and miscellaneous charges can be set up in the Purchase Order Processing

Setup Options window. You also have the option of basing the taxes for noninventoried items, freight, and miscellaneous charges on the vendor. If you select that option, the vendor’s tax schedule is used for the tax calculations. For more information, see the Purchase Order Processing documentation.

Freight and miscellaneous charge tax calculations

Calculations for taxes on freight are based on comparisons between the tax schedule for the transaction—which, depending on the transaction, can be the tax schedule for your company, the customer or the vendor—and the freight tax schedule. For information about freight and miscellaneous charge tax calculations in Invoicing,

Sales Order Processing or Purchase Order Processing, refer to your Invoicing, Sales

Order Processing, or Purchase Order documentation.

Calculations for taxes on miscellaneous charges are based on comparisons between the tax schedule for the transaction and the miscellaneous tax schedule.

148 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 1 T A X O V E R V I E W

The following example illustrates how these tax details are compared in Receivables

Management and Payables Management. Schedule A, B, and C contain these tax details:

Tax Schedule A

TAX001

Tax Schedule B Tax Schedule C

TAX001

TAX004

TAX002

TAX003

TAX004 TAX004

TAX005

TAX006

Assume the tax schedules are assigned in the following manner:

Tax Schedule C Tax Schedule A Tax Schedule B

Freight Miscellaneous

Company Customer/Vendor

Sale/Purchase

Now, assume you’re recording a purchase of goods in Payables Management, and the shipping method is pickup. The tax schedule assigned to the vendor appears as the default schedule, and the following taxes are charged:

Transaction

Purchase: $100 taxed using:

Freight: $10 taxed using:

Details

TAX001

TAX004

TAX005

TAX001

TAX004

Tax Schedule

Tax Schedule C (assigned to the

purchase and vendor) contains details

TAX001, TAX004 and TAX005.

Tax Schedule A (assigned to Freight) and Tax Schedule C (assigned to the

vendor) both contain details TAX001 and TAX004.

Next, assume that you are recording a purchase of goods and the shipping method is set to delivery. The tax schedule assigned to the company appears as the default schedule and the following taxes are charged:

Transaction

Purchase: $100 taxed using:

Freight: $10 taxed using:

Miscellaneous: $10 taxed using:

Details

TAX001

TAX004

TAX001

TAX004

TAX006

TAX004

Tax Schedule

Tax schedule A (assigned to the

company) and tax schedule C (assigned to the purchase) both contain details

TAX001 and TAX004.

Tax schedule A (assigned to freight and to the company) contains details

TAX001, TAX004 and TAX006.

Tax schedule A (assigned to the

company) and tax schedule B (assigned to the transaction) both contain detail

TAX004.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 149

P A R T 4

What to set up tax details for

Withholding taxes

Withholding is a system of taxation used in Australia to pay tax for people who work and earn money under contract, such as providers of architectural services, building and construction companies, cleaning services, engineering services, and motor vehicle repair businesses.

Withholding is paid and recorded differently in Receivables Management and

Payables Management because the debtor who makes the purchase is responsible for remitting the Withholding tax to the government. The company selling the goods or services must write off the amount that the debtor paid to the government.

When a company purchases goods or services from a supplier who is subject to

Withholding, the supplier must include a partially completed Withholding

Deduction Form with his or her bill to the purchasing company.

Using in Receivables Management

The supplier must account for the difference between the amount billed to the purchasing company and the amount actually received due to the amount that was remitted to the taxing authority on its behalf. To do this in Microsoft Dynamics GP, the supplier would follow this scenario:

• An accounts receivable clerk prepares a bill for the full amount of goods or services rendered. The clerk also prepares a Withholding Deduction Form, showing the amount billed.

• The supplier sends the bill and the partially completed Withholding Deduction

Form to the purchasing company.

• When the payment is received, the accounts receivable clerk records the amount received.

• In addition, the clerk for the supplier should record the Withholding amount in the Additional Tax Distributions and Writeoffs window.

Using in Payables Management

The purchasing company is required to remit the Withholding on behalf of the supplier. To do this using Microsoft Dynamics GP, the purchasing company would follow this scenario:

• An accounts payable clerk creates a creditor record for the supplier and records the withholding rate in the Creditor Withholding Options window.

• When the purchasing company receives the supplier’s bill, the clerk records the full bill amount.

• When the clerk pays the bill, however, the Withholding amount is deducted from the payment and a separate document for the Withholding amount is created automatically, payable to the Withholding creditor (usually the taxing authority) specified in the Company Setup Options window.

150 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 1 T A X O V E R V I E W

• The purchasing company would send the Withholding payment to the taxing authority, along with the completed Withholding Deduction Form showing the total amount billed and the Withholding amount deducted, and a

Reconciliation Form.

• In addition, the clerk for the purchasing company should record the

Withholding amount in the Additional Tax Distributions and Writeoffs window.

Transactions for Withholding amounts

When entering transactions for Withholding amounts, use the following windows to enter the Withholding amounts.

Window

Additional Tax and Writeoff

Distributions (Receivables)

Additional Tax and Write Off

Distributions (Payables)

Field

Unposted Write-offs

Distributed to Withholding:

Withholding Amount

Unposted Write-offs

Distributed to Withholding:

Withholding Amount

What to enter

The Withholding amount that the debtor paid to the tax office on your behalf.

The amount you are paying to the tax office on the creditor’s behalf.

Example

Assume a supplier is a building contractor with a Withholding rate of 20%. If the purchasing company buys $1,000 of contracting services from the supplier, the supplier must provide a partially completed Withholding Deduction form with the bill for $1,000.

The purchasing company would record the purchase for $1,000; when the bill was paid, a check for $800 would be printed for the supplier, and a separate payment for

$200 (20% of the $1,000 sale) would be created for the Withholding taxing authority.

The purchasing company would send the completed Withholding Deduction form to the taxing authority along with this payment.

When the supplier receives the payment, it will use the Additional Tax and Writeoff

Distributions window to record the $200 that the purchasing company remitted to the taxation office.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 151

152 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 22: Tax details

The Tax Detail Maintenance window can be used to add, change, or delete tax details. Tax details identify the tax specifics that are used in a tax schedule for a customer, vendor, or item.

This information contains the following sections:

•

•

Minimum and maximum taxable amounts

•

Setting up tax details

What to set up tax details for

Set up a tax detail for each tax rate in each jurisdiction where you plan to do business.

• If you plan to sell goods or services in that jurisdiction, set up a sales tax detail.

• If you plan to purchase goods or services in that jurisdiction, set up a purchases tax detail.

• If different goods or services are taxed at different rates, set up a separate tax detail for each type of good or service. (Be sure to set up both sales and purchases details, if applicable.)

If certain goods and services aren’t taxable in a particular jurisdiction, you may not need to set up a tax detail for them. However, if you are required to track sales or purchases of these exempt or zero-rate taxes, you can set up tax details to do so.

Minimum and maximum taxable amounts

When you set up tax details, you can specify minimum and maximum taxable amounts. For example, if the law requires that at least $100 must be purchased before any tax is added to the sale price, enter $100 as the minimum taxable amount.

If the tax only applies to amounts up to $500, enter $500 as the maximum taxable amount.

You also can indicate whether tax should be calculated on the full amount. In this example, the full $500 is taxable if you select Full Amount from the Include list. If you select Amount within Range, the difference between the $100 minimum and

$500 maximum—$400—is taxable.

Refer to the following tables for more information.

Full Amount

Minimum = $100

Sale amount

$50

$150

$400

$550

Maximum = $500

Tax calculated?

Yes

Tax calculated on:

—

$150

$400

$500 (Full amount)

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 153

P A R T 4

Amount within Range

Minimum = $100

Sale amount

$50

$150

$400

$550

Maximum = $500

Tax calculated?

Yes

Tax calculated on:

—

$50 ($150 - Minimum)

$300 ($400 - Minimum)

$400 (Maximum - Minimum)

Setting up tax details

Use the Tax Detail Maintenance window to set up tax details.

To set up tax details:

Open the Tax Detail Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Tax Details)

Enter a tax detail ID and a description for the detail. You may want to use a descriptive ID that will identify the tax as sales or purchases, such as NY-S for a

New York sales tax or GST-P for purchases.

Because the details are sorted in alphanumeric order, you may want to name them so they sort in the order that you want. Give the details names such as

VAT07 and VAT16 to make them sort correctly.

In the Type list, select either Sales or Purchases.

In the Tax ID Number field, enter your tax registration code for this tax, if your country requires it.

In the Account field, enter an account to track taxes paid or received. For example, you might select a Sales Tax Payable account for sales type details and a Sales Tax Expense account or Input Tax Credit account for purchase type details.

154 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 2 T A X D E T A I L S

If you are setting up a purchasing tax detail for Australian GST, specify whether you want the purchase tax detail to be posted to a tax detail account, vendor purchase account, or inventory account. This field wont be available for a sales tax detail.

For the History option, mark one or both of the selections.

• Mark Calendar Year to track tax detail history by calendar months, which will help you track information that the government may require.

• Mark Fiscal Year to track tax detail information for each of the periods you defined for the fiscal year. This information allows you to print reports that accurately reflect activity in each fiscal period.

From the Based On list, select a tax base. Your selection will determine how taxes for this detail are calculated.

• In Canada, a general GST is considered a percent of sale/purchase tax. In the United Kingdom, a general VAT is considered a percent of sale/ purchase tax.

• In Canada, some PST taxes are considered percent of sale/purchase plus taxable taxes. The percent of sale/purchase plus taxable taxes tax base is rarely if ever used in the United States.

From the Round list, select a method by which you want to round the tax amount.

10. In the Percentage or Amount field, enter the rate or amount of the tax detail.

The name of the field changes depending on your selection in the Based On list.

11. In the Based On Detail field, select the tax detail this tax is based on, if applicable.

12. In the Taxable Amount Min and Max fields, enter the minimum and maximum taxable amount for this detail, if applicable. If you don’t enter a minimum or maximum, taxes will be calculated on transactions of any amount.

If there is no maximum taxable amount, don’t enter anything other than 0 in the maximum taxable amount field.

If the amount shown in that field is greater than zero, Microsoft Dynamics GP will compare the taxable amount to the maximum each time taxes are recalculated, which can significantly increase processing time. If the amount in the Taxable Amount Max field is 0, Microsoft Dynamics GP doesn’t perform the comparison and processing time is reduced.

13. If you entered a minimum or maximum taxable amount, complete the following steps:

• Use the Include list to select whether to calculate the tax on the full amount of the transaction or only to the amount that’s within the minimum - maximum range of the tax.

• Use the Qualifiers list to select what the taxable minimum and maximum are compared to when deciding whether the tax should be calculated. The selection you make in the Based On field determines which options appear in the Qualifiers list.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 155

P A R T 4

What to set up tax schedules for

14. If other taxes will be calculated on this tax, mark the Taxable Tax option. For example, if the GST on an item may be in the amount taxed by PST, mark the

GST detail as a taxable tax.

15. If you’re required by law to identify taxes on invoices, complete the following steps:

• Mark the Print on Documents option.

• In the field next to Print on Documents, enter a one-character code, such as

G for GST or P for PST. The character will appear on your invoices next to each of the items taxed.

16. Mark the Tax Invoice Required option if you want to claim any input tax on your Business Activity Statement (BAS) for the tax detail. If you mark this field and a purchase transaction uses this tax detail, the Tax Invoice Required field will be marked for the transaction. For more information about BAS, refer to your GST and Australian Tax documentation

17. Select the BAS assignments for the tax detail. These assignments will be used to determine which amounts should be printed in each field on the BAS. For more information about BAS, refer to your GST and Australian Tax documentation.

18. To enter address information for the taxing authority, choose the Address button. (The address for the tax detail is used on period-end reports for the taxing authority.)

• In the Tax Detail Address window, enter the address.

• Choose OK to save the address and redisplay the Tax Detail Maintenance window.

19. Choose Save to save the tax detail.

20. Verify your entries with a Tax Detail ID Report. (In the Tax Detail ID field, select a tax detail, then choose File >> Print.)

156 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 23: Tax schedules

After you’ve set up details for all the taxes you’re required to collect or pay, you can begin creating tax schedules. Tax schedules are groups of tax details that are assigned to a transaction. These schedules are used to calculate all the taxes that apply to a sales or purchase transaction.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

•

Setting up a tax schedule

•

Copying a tax schedule

•

Setting up default company tax schedules

What to set up tax schedules for

For each jurisdiction where you plan to do business, set up the following tax schedules:

• A purchases tax schedule, including all purchases tax details that apply to that jurisdiction. Purchases tax schedules are assigned to vendor records, and a default purchases tax schedule can be specified in the Payables Management

Setup Options window.

• A sales tax schedule, including all sales tax details that apply to that jurisdiction. Sales tax schedules are assigned to customer records, and a default sales tax schedule can be specified in the Receivables Management Setup

Options window.

For each category of inventoried items that you buy or sell that is taxed at different rates in different jurisdictions, set up a single tax schedule:

• An item tax schedule that contains applicable tax details for all jurisdictions. Be sure to include both sales and purchases details in this tax schedule. Item tax schedules are assigned to item records.

For non-inventoried items, freight, and miscellaneous charges, set up the following tax schedules:

• At least one non-inventoried item tax schedule, including the tax details that most commonly apply to the non-inventoried items you buy or sell. Noninventoried tax schedules are assigned to transactions.

• At least one freight tax schedule, including the tax details that most commonly apply to the freight charges you incur. Freight tax schedules are assigned to transactions.

• At least one miscellaneous charge tax schedule, including the tax details that most commonly apply to the miscellaneous charges you incur. Miscellaneous charge tax schedules are assigned to transactions.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 157

P A R T 4

See Chapter 21, “Tax overview,” for information about how default tax schedules

Default tax schedules for non-inventoried items, freight, and miscellaneous charges are specified in the setup options window for each module in which these tax schedules can be used.

In addition to the other recommended tax schedules, you may want to set up a tax schedule that contains all tax details.

Setting up a tax schedule

You’ll use the Tax Schedule Maintenance window to set up a tax schedule. You can use the Copy button to create schedules if you have a long list of details that belong in several schedules. For more information see

Copying a tax schedule

on page 159.

To set up a tax schedule:

Open the Tax Schedule Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Tax Schedules)

Enter a tax schedule ID and a description. You may want to identify your schedule with a descriptive name. For example, if you’re creating a tax schedule for the city of Austin, Texas, you may want to name the schedule TXAUST.

To add details to the schedule, complete the following steps for each detail you want to add:

• In the Available Tax Detail IDs list, select the tax detail you want to add.

• Choose the Insert button; the detail is inserted in the Selected Tax Detail IDs list.

• If the Auto-Calc. option is available, you can mark this option to include tax details in the tax calculation. Tax calculations will be based on the tax details marked to automatically calculate. This option is available if you marked the Specify Tax Details for Automatic Tax Calculation option in the

Company Setup Options window.

Choose Save to save the schedule.

158 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 3 T A X S C H E D U L E S

Verify your entries with a Tax Schedule Report. (In the Tax Schedule ID field, select a tax schedule, then choose File >> Print.)

Copying a tax schedule

To save time, you can copy all tax details from an existing tax schedule into the tax schedule you’re currently setting up using the Tax Schedule Maintenance window.

For example, assume that you’ve created a schedule for Illinois taxes, and now you want to create a sales tax schedule for the city of Chicago. The tax schedule for

Chicago should include Illinois taxes. Rather than inserting each Illinois tax separately, you can enter an ID and description for the Chicago tax, such as ILCHIC and copy the Illinois tax details to the new tax schedule. Then you can insert the other tax details that apply to the city of Chicago.

To copy a tax schedule:

Open the Tax Schedule Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Tax Schedules)

Enter the ID and description for the new schedule.

Choose Copy.

In the Tax Schedule Copy window, enter or select the name of the existing schedule you want to copy and choose OK to close the window. The details for the existing schedule are copied to the Selected Tax Detail IDs list. You can copy from more than one schedule.

In the Tax Schedule Maintenance window, add or delete details to complete the new schedule.

Choose Save to save the schedule.

Setting up default company tax schedules

Once you’ve set up your tax schedules, you should assign default tax schedules to your company using the Company Setup window.

are used.

To set up default company tax schedules:

Open the Company Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company)

Enter the default sales tax schedule for the company.

Enter the default purchases tax schedule for the company.

Choose OK to save your changes.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 159

160 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Part 5: Workflow setup

This part of the documentation explains how to set up the Workflow system and create individual workflows.

•

Chapter 24, “Plan the Workflow setup,”

provides a checklist to help guide you through the setup process.

•

Chapter 25, “Workflow E-mail Setup,”

helps you set up e-mail options to send messages and perform actions in messages. You also can create messages that you can send to originators and approvers.

•

Chapter 26, “Configure the Workflow calendar,”

explains what the Workflow calendar is and how to configure it.

•

Chapter 27, “Configure a workflow,”

helps you create and configure a workflow.

•

Chapter 28, “Configure a workflow step,” explains how to define a specific step

of a workflow.

•

Chapter 29, “Set up Workflow delegates,” explains how to delegate workflow

tasks.

•

Chapter 30, “Workflow maintenance,” explains how to copy a workflow from

one company to another, how to modify a workflow, and how to delete and inactivate workflows you’re no longer using.

162 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 24: Plan the Workflow setup

The following information will help guide you through setting up the Workflow system.

•

Workflow setup checklist

•

Prepare for the Workflow setup

Workflow setup checklist

To set up the Workflow system, you’ll need to complete several tasks. The following table lists the tasks you’ll need to complete and the order in which you should complete them.

Task

1. Be sure that the SQL Server Agent service is set up to start automatically with the operating system.

If the SQL Server Agent service isn’t set up to start automatically, the escalation action you selected for your workflows will not be performed.

For more information

Refer to the Microsoft SQL Server Books

Online.

When an approver fails to act on a task by the task’s due date, the task is considered overdue, or escalated. You can select the action to be taken when a task in the workflow overdue in the Workflow Maintenance window.

2. Install Web Services for Microsoft Dynamics GP.

This component is required if you want to perform actions directly from the e-mail message, such as an approving a document.

Refer to the Microsoft Dynamics GP Web

Services Installation and Administration

Guide. Web Services for Microsoft Dynamics

GP can be installed from the Microsoft

Dynamics GP installation media.

Note: When you install Web Services, be sure that the application user account is a domain account that has privileges to access Active Directory.

3. Set up e-mail options for workflow.

Set up e-mail options for Workflow so you can send e-mail messages and perform actions in e-mail messages such as such as approving or rejecting a document.

Chapter 25, “Workflow E-mail Setup”

4. Set up e-mail messages for workflow notifications.

Create messages that you can send to originators and approvers when workflow tasks are assigned to them or when documents they’ve submitted have completed the workflow approval process.

Chapter 25, “Workflow E-mail Setup”

5. Display workflow task on your home page.

Mark the Microsoft Workflow tasks option to display a list of the workflow tasks that are assigned to you on your home page.

Refer to Customizing the To Do area on your home page in the System Uer’s Guide.

5. Configure the Workflow calendar.

Configure the Workflow calendar to show which days are work days and which days are non-work days for each of your companies. The Workflow system will count only the work days when calculating a step’s deadline.

Chapter 26, “Configure the Workflow calendar.”

Chapter 27, “Configure a workflow.”

6. Create workflow.

Create and configure workflow, such as a purchase order workflow or a requisition workflow.

7. Delegate Workflow tasks.

Specify how to delegate tasks.

Chapter 29, “Set up Workflow delegates.”

Prepare for the Workflow setup

The best way to prepare for setting up the Workflow system is to create diagrams illustrating the workflow you want to create. We recommend you draw each workflow using a software program such as Microsoft Office Visio, or by simply using pen and paper.

Your diagrams should indicate:

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 163

Setting up e-mail options for Workflow

• The order in which the workflow steps occur

• Who the approvers are at each step, and the conditions under which their approval is required

For example, your diagram may look similar to the following workflow diagram.

1a.

Frank

Must approve if the vendor is

Adventure

Works.

2a.

Andreas

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

3a.

Ann

Must approve if greater than

$20,000.

Pilar

Must approve if greater than

$50,000.

Sam

submits a purchase order.

1b.

Sue

Must approve is the vendor is

Contoso, Ltd.

2b.

Jill

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

3b.

John

Must approve if greater than

$20,000.

164 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 25: Workflow E-mail Setup

By setting up e-mail options for Workflow, you can send messages and perform actions in messages such as approving or rejecting a document. You also can create messages to send to originators and approvers when workflow tasks are assigned to them or when documents they’ve submitted have completed the workflow approval process.

•

•

Sending a test e-mail message for Workflow

•

Setting up messages for Workflow

•

Customizing a workflow message with additional fields

•

Adding document item fields to a workflow message

Setting up e-mail options for Workflow

You can use the Workflow Setup window to set up e-mail options for Workflow.

After marking the Enable E-Mail for Workflow option, enter the e-mail address, the

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server, and authentication information for the e-mail account so you can send e-mail notifications.

If you enable e-mail actions, you can perform actions directly from the e-mail message, such as approving a document. Be sure that you have installed Microsoft

Dynamics GP Web Services and that the application user account set up in

Microsoft Dynamics GP Web Services is a domain account that has privileges to access Active Directory.

To set up e-mail options for Workflow

Open the Workflow Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Workflow Setup)

Mark the Enable E-Mail for Workflow option to send e-mail notifications.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 165

Sending a test e-mail message for Workflow

Enter the name of the e-mail address for the account. This is the e-mail address that e-mail is sent from.

Enter the name to show on e-mail messages sent from this account. The display name is optional.

Enter the name of the SMTP server the account uses to send e-mail. Typically this is in a format similar to smtp.<your_company>.com.

Enter the port number of the SMTP server for this account. The default port is

25.

Mark the This server requires a secure connection (SSL) option if required.

Select which credentials to use when sending e-mail. You can use the credentials of the SQL Server Database Engine, other credentials that you supply, or anonymously.

Choose Test E-mail button to open the Test Workflow E-Mail window. You can use this window to send an e-mail message to verify that you can send a message using the current settings. See

on page 166 for more information.

10. Mark the Enable E-Mail Action option to take actions in e-mail notifications such as such as approving or rejecting a document.

11. Enter the name of the Web Services server.

12. Enter the port number of the Web Services server. The default port is 48620

13. Mark the This server requires a secure connection (SSL) option if required.

14. Choose Test E-mail Action button to verify your server information for

Microsoft Dynamics GP Web Services and the connectivity to the server.

Sending a test e-mail message for Workflow

After setting up e-mail options in the Workflow Setup window, you can use the Test

Workflow E-Mail window to send a test message.

To send a test message for Workflow:

Open the Workflow Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Workflow Setup >> Test E-Mail)

166 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 5 W O R K F L O W E - M A I L S E T U P

Enter a valid e-mail address for the test e-mail message.

Enter a subject line for the message. The default entry is “Test E-Mail for

Microsoft Dynamics GP Workflow”.

Enter the message that will appear in the e-mail when sending the test message.The default entry for the body is “This is a test e-mail for Microsoft

Dynamics GP Workflow.”

Choose Send Test E-Mail.

Setting up messages for Workflow

Use the Message Setup window to create messages that you can send to notify a user when a workflow step is assigned or an originator when a workflow action is completed. Messages can be predefined on a workflow type basis.

You also can customize your messages by adding fields that are associated with a document type or workflow. For example, you could add the action deadline or comments from the originator of a purchase order approval.

To set up messages for Workflow:

Open the Message Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Workflow >> E-mail Message

Setup)

Enter an ID to identify the message.

Enter a description of the message ID.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 167

with a document or workflow. See

Select Workflow Assignment or Workflow Action Completed as the message type.

Select the series in which you want this message to appear. Messages assigned to All can be used with all series that have workflow types.

Select a document type from the series you selected. This field isn’t available if you selected All as the series.

Enter a subject line for the message.

You also can customize the subject line by adding a field or fields associated

Customizing a workflow message with additional fields

on page 168 for more information.

Enter the message that will appear in the e-mail when sending notifications.

You also can customize the message by adding a field or fields associated with a document or workflow. See

Customizing a workflow message with additional fields

on page 168 for more information.

Choose Document Lines to add document line item information in a message body. Document line items can be used to make decisions on whether to approve or reject the document in workflow. See

Adding document item fields to a workflow message

on page 169 for more information.

This tab is not available if you selected All as the series.

10. Enter or select an address that the originator or approver can use to send a reply to a specific e-mail address. For example, assume that you have entered [email protected] as the reply to address. If you send a document in email to an approver, the approver receives e-mail from [email protected]. When the vendor replies to the e-mail, [email protected] is used in the To field.

11. Choose Validate to verify the field or fields you added to the message body or subject line match the document type assigned to the message.

12. Choose Save to save the message ID.

Customizing a workflow message with additional fields

You customize the subject or message body by adding a field or fields associated with a document type and workflow from the series you selected. For example, you could add the action deadline or comments from the originator of a purchase order approval.

To customize a workflow message with additional fields:

Enter an ID to identify the message.

Select Workflow Assignment or Workflow Action Completed as the message type.

168 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 5 W O R K F L O W E - M A I L S E T U P

• Select Workflow Assignment if you are creating messages that notifying a user that a workflow action has been assigned to him or her.

• Select Workflow Action Completed if you are creating messages that you can send to the workflow originator informing the user that action has been completed for the workflow.

Select the series in which you want this message to appear. Messages assigned to All can be used with all series that have workflow types.

Select a document type from the series you selected. This field isn’t available if you selected All as the series.

Place the cursor in the Subject field or in the message body.

Select Document Fields or Workflow fields.

From the Field field, select an additional field.

Choose Insert.

To customize a workflow message with additional fields using the right-click menu:

Enter an ID to identify the message.

Select Workflow Assignment or Workflow Action Completed as the message type.

Select the series in which you want this message to appear. Messages assigned to All can be used with all series that have workflow types.

Select a document type from the series you selected. This field isn’t available if you selected All as the series.

Place the cursor in the Subject field or in the message body.

Right-click in the body or subject of a message ID and select Insert.

In the Insert window, select the field or fields you want to add.

Choose OK.

Adding document item fields to a workflow message

You customize the body of a workflow message by adding document line item information associated with a document type from the series you selected. For example, you could add a line number, item number, unit of measure, quantity ordered, unit cost, and extended cost in a message for a purchase order workflow.

An approver can use the purchase order line item detail you added to the message to make a decision on whether to approve or reject the document.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 169

Overview of the Workflow calendar

To customize a workflow message with additional fields:

Enter an ID to identify the message.

Select Workflow Assignment or Workflow Action Completed as the message type.

Select the series in which you want this message to appear. Messages assigned to All can be used with all series that have workflow types.

Select a document type from the series you selected. This field isn’t available if you selected All as the series.

Choose Document Lines to add document line item information to the message.

This tab is are not available if you selected All as the series.

The fields that display in the Selected Fields list are the fields that appear in the message.

In the Available Fields list, select a field you want to use in the body of the message and choose Insert. Choose Insert All to move all fields to the Selected

Fields list.

To remove a field from the Selected Fields list, select it and choose Remove.

Choose Remove All to remove all fields.

To change the order of how the fields appear in a message, use the Move up and

Move down buttons.

170 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 26: Configure the Workflow calendar

As part of setting up the Workflow system, you need to configure a Workflow calendar. The following sections explain what the Workflow calendar is and how to configure it.

•

•

Configure the Workflow calendar

Overview of the Workflow calendar

The Workflow calendar shows which days are work days and which are non-work days. The Workflow system will count only the work days when calculating a step’s due date. The Workflow calendar uses the date and time values from server that has

Microsoft Dynamics GP installed. Work days are typical work days and times for the company. A task’s due date is calculated using the time limit specified for workflow steps and the work days and times entered in the Workflow Calendar window. The Workflow calendar uses the date and time values from server that has

Microsoft Dynamics GP installed.

For example, assume that you have set up a calendar to have Monday through

Friday as the work days and 8 A.M. to 5 P.M. as hours worked for each day. The workflow step assigned to Amy, the purchasing manager, gives Amy a four–hour time limit to act on her workflow task. Using the Workflow calendar, if Amy is assigned a purchase order at 3 P.M. on Monday, she’ll have until 10 A.M. on

Tuesday to approve or reject the purchase order.

As another example, assume that the workflow step assigned to Amy gives her a three days to act on her workflow tasks. Using the Workflow calendar, if Amy is assigned a purchase order at 2 P.M. on Thursday, she’ll have until 2 P.M. of Tuesday to approve or reject the purchase order. This is because Saturday and Sunday are not counted toward the task’s due date.

Non-work days are not counted against the time limit set for activity assignments for workflow steps. For example, assume that you have set up a calendar to have

Monday through Friday as the work days and 8 A.M. to 5 P.M. as hours worked for each day. Plus, you added Monday, July 22 to the calendar as a non-working day.

The workflow step assigned to Amy gives her two days to act on her workflow tasks. Using the Workflow calendar, if Amy is assigned a purchase order at 3 PM on

Thursday, July 18, she’ll have until 3 P.M. of Tuesday, July 23 to approve or reject the purchase order.

Configure the Workflow calendar

The Workflow calendar shows which days are work days and which are non-work days. The Workflow system will count only the work days when calculating a step’s due date.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 171

Creating and configuring a workflow checklist

To configure the Workflow calendar:

Open the Workflow Calendar window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Workflow >>Workflow Calendar)

Select the option for each day that is typically a work day in your company and enter the start and end time of the day.

To define non-work days, select the year that you want to define non-work days for.

Enter the date and description of the non-work day.

Choose Save.

172 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 27: Configure a workflow

Creating and configuring a workflow is a multiple step process. The first section in this chapter provides the checklist you can use to create and configure a workflow.

The second section in this chapter provides a detailed procedure you’ll need to follow to create and configure a workflow.

•

•

Creating and configuring a workflow

Creating and configuring a workflow checklist

To create and configure a workflow, you’ll need to complete several tasks. The following steps lists the tasks you’ll need to complete and the order in which you should complete them. See

Creating and configuring a workflow

for more detailed steps.

Open the Workflow Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Workflow >>Workflow

Maintenance)

Select the type of workflow to create.

Choose New Workflow.

Name the workflow.

Indicate whether notifications should be sent for completed actions.

Indicate whether approvers can delegate tasks.

Indicate whether an originator should be an approver.

Indicate if documents should be approved by at least one person.

Specify an alternate final approver.

10.

Indicate what should happen when a task is overdue.

11. Choose Save Workflow.

12.

Set up the workflow steps.

13.

Activate the workflow.

Creating and configuring a workflow

A workflow is the approval process for a document. A workflow defines how a document “flows” through the system by showing who must approve it, and the conditions under which they must approve it.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 173

Copying a workflow on page 191.

To create and configure a workflow:

Open the Workflow Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Workflow >>Workflow

Maintenance)

Select the type of workflow to create.

Select the series and then the workflow type in the tree view. Each workflow you create will be based on a type. The type indicates the purpose of the workflow. After you select the type of workflow you want to create, you can define the properties of the workflow.

At least one manager must be selected before you can activate a workflow for the type.

Choose the Manager lookup button to open the Workflow User Selection window to add managers to the workflow type.

174 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 7 C O N F I G U R E A W O R K F L O W

Choose New Workflow.

Name the workflow.

Enter a unique name for the workflow. We recommend that the name include your company name and the type of document the workflow is for. For example, if you’re configuring a workflow for purchase orders created in the

Fabrikam sample company, you may want to name the workflow “Fabrikam

Purchase Orders.”

You also can enter a description of the workflow, such “Multiple approval steps for purchase orders.”

You can choose the Copy button to copy an existing workflow from one company to another company. For more information, see

Indicate whether notifications should be sent for completed actions.

You can send notifications messages to users when the documents they’ve submitted have completed actions in the workflow approval process.

Mark the Send notifications for completed actions option and choose the expansion button to open Workflow Email Notification Maintenance window.

You can use this window to select which completed action that the originator should be notified about, the message to send for the notification of the action, and the carbon-copy (cc) recipients of the notification.

Indicate whether approvers can delegate tasks.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 175

To allow an approver to delegate a task to another approver in the workflow, mark the Allow approver to manually delegate tasks option.

For example, assume that Frank is reviewing a purchase order. If the Allow approver to delegate tasks option has been selected, Frank will be able to delegate the purchase order to another approver in the workflow.

Indicate whether an originator should be an approver.

Any user who creates a document such as a purchase order can submit it for approval. You can specify that the originator for the workflow can be an approver.

For example, assume that Sue submits a purchase order for Northwind Traders totalling $25,000.

1a.

Frank

Must approve if the vendor is

Northwind

Traders.

2a.

Andreas

Must ALWAYS approve.

3a.

Ann

Must ALWAYS approve.

Sue

submits a purchase order.

1b.

Jill

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

2b.

Sue

Must approve if greater than

$20,000.

3b.

John

Must approve if greater than

$30,000.

The system starts by evaluating the first steps to determine if approval is required there. Since the purchase order meets the conditions specified in both first steps, it is sent to Frank and Jill for approval.

When Frank and Jill approve the purchase order, it is assigned to Andreas and

Sue. Note that Sue will have to approve her own purchase order. After Andreas approves the purchase order, Ann must approve it.

176 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 7 C O N F I G U R E A W O R K F L O W

Suppose the Allow originator to be an approver option is not selected. This means that when Sue submits a document for approval, she is removed from the list of approvers for the step, and replaced by the alternate final approver, or manager if there is no alternate final approver.

1a.

Frank

Must approve if the vendor is

Northwind

Traders.

2a.

Andreas

Must ALWAYS approve.

3a.

Ann

Must ALWAYS approve.

Sue

submits a purchase order.

1b.

Jill

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

2b.

Sue

Must approve if greater than

$20,000.

3b.

John

Must approve if greater than

$30,000.

To understand this better, review the top approval path. Because Sue is not part of this approval path, the system starts at the first step in the path and determines if approval is required there. From that point, the purchase order will move along the approval path as required.

Now review the bottom approval path. Because Sue is an approver in this approval path, the assignment is changed to the alternate final approver or workflow manager.

Keep in mind, approvers always can submit documents for approval. This option does not affect their ability to submit documents for approval.

Indicate if documents should be approved by at least one person.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 177

Chapter 28, “Configure a workflow step.”

There may be cases when a document does not require approval. For example, consider the following workflow. If Sam submits a purchase order for $100, no approval is needed because the purchase order does not meet any of the conditions specified in the workflow steps. In this scenario, the purchase order will be saved automatically with a status of No Action Needed.

Sam

submits a purchase order.

Frank

Must approve if greater than

$1,000.

Sue

Must approve if greater than

$5,000.

Ann

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

If you want documents to be approved by at least one person, select the Always require at least one approver option. Documents that do not meet any of the specified conditions will be routed to the alternate final approver in the workflow. For more information about the alternate final approver, see the next step.

Specify an alternate final approver.

The final approver is the last person in the approval path who is required to approve a document. For example, assume that Sam submits a purchase order for Northwind Traders totalling $7,000. This purchase order must be approved by Frank and Sue. Because the purchase order is not greater than $10,000, Ann’s approval is not required. In this scenario, Sue is the final approver.

Sam

submits a purchase order.

Frank

Must approve if greater than

$1,000.

Sue

Must approve if greater than

$5,000.

Ann

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

Mark the Use alternate final approver option and enter the name of an alternate final approver if you want a different escalation approver. The alternate final approver is assigned to the approval action under the following conditions.

• The Always Require at Least One Approver option is marked and there are no approval steps whose conditions are met.

• The Always Require at Least One Approver option is marked and the approver edits the document and there are no following approval steps.

• There are no approval steps following an overdue step, depending on your escalation settings.

178 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 7 C O N F I G U R E A W O R K F L O W

To better understand when the alternate final approver is used, assume that

Ann edits the $11,000 purchase order that Sam submitted. Ann increases the quantity of items requested so that the purchase order now totals $12,000. She then approves the document. Ann typically would be the final approver

(because the document is more than $10,000). However, because Ann edited the document, she can’t final approve it. The document will be sent to the alternate final approver for approval.

10. Indicate what should happen when a task is overdue.

When an approver fails to act on a task by the task’s due date, the task is considered overdue, or escalated. Indicate what should happen to overdue tasks by selecting one of the following options.

Take no action

Select this option if you want the task to remain assigned to the current approver.

Escalate to next approver

Select this option if you want the system to automatically assign the task to the next approver in the workflow.

Escalate to

Select this option if you want the system to automatically assign the task to a specific user. You must enter the name of the user you want the task assigned to.

Automatically reject the overdue

Select this option if you want the system to automatically reject the task.

11. Choose Save Workflow.

12. Set up the workflow steps.

Choose the New Workflow Step button to add a step to this workflow. For instructions on how to configure a step, see

13. Activate the workflow.

You can create multiple workflows of a specific workflow type. For example, you can create multiple purchase order workflows. However, only one workflow of that type can be used at a time. The Active option indicates which workflow of that type will be used.

Mark the Active option to make the workflow you’re configuring the active workflow. You must have at least one step created for the workflow before you can activate a workflow. If you do not want to implement this workflow in your company just yet, leave the Active option unmarked.

If there is already an active workflow of this type, you’ll need to deactivate that workflow first, before activating this workflow. When you save the workflow and there is already an active workflow of this type, a message appears stating that there may be only one active workflow per workflow type. If you decide that the current workflow should be the active workflow, the Active option for the other workflow is unmarked.

Before inactivating an existing workflow, you may want to verify that all documents submitted to the workflow have been processed.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 179

180 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 28: Configure a workflow step

As part of configuring a workflow, you’ll need to define the specific steps in the workflow. The first section in this chapter provides a checklist you can use to configure a workflow step. The second section in this chapter provides the detailed procedure you’ll need to follow to configure a workflow step.

•

Configuring a workflow step checklist

•

Configuring a workflow step

Configuring a workflow step checklist

To create and configure a workflow step, you’ll need to complete several tasks. The following steps list the tasks you’ll need to complete and the order in which you should complete them. See

Configuring a workflow step

for more detailed steps.

From the Workflow Maintenance window, select the workflow for which you want to a create a step and click the New Step button.

Name the step.

Specify a step type.

Specify where this step should occur.

Specify when approval or task is required at this step.

Assign approvers.

Set a time limit.

Send a notification message.

Specify the completion policy of a step.

10. Choose Save Step.

Configuring a workflow step

You can define the order in which a workflow step falls in the workflow, conditions for running the step, and properties associated with assigning the activity to users.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 181

To configure a workflow step:

From the Workflow Maintenance window, select the workflow for which you want to a create a step and click the New Step button.

Name the step.

Enter a unique name for the step. We recommend that you keep the step names simple, such as Step 1 and Step 2, or Purchasing Manager Approval and CEO

Approval. Keeping the step names simple will help you manage the order in which they occur.

You also can enter a description of the workflow step, such Approval for purchase orders over $5000 or Perform credit check.

Specify a step type.

Approval

If this step requires that a user must give approval as part of the workflow process, select Approval.

Task

If this step requires that a user must complete a procedure as part of the workflow process, select Task.

Specify where this step should occur.

You must specify where this step should occur in the workflow.

First step in the workflow

If this step is the first step in the workflow, select

This step is a first step.

182 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Sam

submits a purchase order.

C H A P T E R 2 8 C O N F I G U R E A W O R K F L O W S T E P

Keep in mind, you can have multiple first steps. For example, review the following workflow illustration. Notice that steps 1a, 1b, and 1c are all first steps.

Sam

submits a purchase order.

1a.

Frank

Must approve if the vendor is

Adventure

Works.

1b.

Andreas

Must approve if the vendor is

Contoso, Ltd.

Sue

Must approve if greater than

$5,000.

Ann

Must approve if greater than

$20,000.

Maria

Must approve if greater than

$50,000.

1c.

Must approve if the vendor is

Northwind

Traders.

Subsequent step in the workflow

If this step is not a first step, select This step follows the selected step. Then select the workflow step that this step should follow. For example, consider the following workflow illustration. Notice that step 4 follows step 3a.

1a.

Frank

Must approve if the vendor is

Adventure

Works.

2a.

Andreas

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

3a.

Ann

Must approve if greater than

$20,000.

Pilar

Must approve if greater than

$50,000.

1b.

Sue

Must approve is the vendor is

Contoso, Ltd.

2b.

Jill

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

3b.

John

Must approve if greater than

$20,000.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 183

Sam

submits a purchase order.

For example, assume that your company requires verification of the unit cost of each item on a purchase order before the purchase order can be approved. Sam has submitted a purchase order for $5,000. Frank must perform an action step of verifying the unit costs of the items on the purchase order before Sue can start the approval process.

Frank

Must verify unit cost of items if greater than

$500.

Sue

Must approve if greater than

$1,000.

Bill, Jo, Mary

Must approve if greater than

$5,000.

Ann

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

Specify when approval or task is required at this step.

You must specify when approval or a task is required at this step. Approval or a task may be required always, or only under specific conditions.

Action is always required

If approval or task is always required at this step, select the Action is always required for this step option.

Keep in mind, if you select this option, it doesn’t mean that this step will always occur in the workflow; rather, it means that any document that reaches this step must always be approved or the task be completed.

To understand this better, consider the following workflow illustration. There are two approval paths for purchase orders: one for purchase orders for

Adventure Works, the other for purchase orders for Contoso, Ltd. Notice that when a purchase order for Contoso, Ltd. reaches step 2b, Jill’s approval is always required. Purchase orders for Adventure Works will never reach step 2b, so Jill’s approval is not required in those situations.

184 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 8 C O N F I G U R E A W O R K F L O W S T E P

1a.

Frank

Must approve if the vendor is

Adventure

Works.

2a.

Andreas

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

3a.

Ann

Must approve if greater than

$20,000.

Sam

submits a purchase order.

1b.

Sue

Must approve if the vendor is

Contoso, Ltd.

2b.

Jill

Must ALWAYS approve.

3b.

John

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

4b.

Pilar

Must approve if greater than

$20,000.

Action is required under specific conditions

If approval or a task at this step is required only under specific conditions, select the Action is required only when the following conditions is met option. Then specify the conditions under which approval or the action is required. Choose the expansion button to open the Workflow Condition Editor window.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 185

Workflow calendar on page 171.

For an example of adding a specific condition, consider the previous workflow diagram. Notice that Frank’s approval is required only when the vendor on the purchase order is Adventure Works. You would use the following steps to add

Frank’s approval requirement as a condition.

Open the Workflow Condition Editor.

Since this is the first condition created for the workflow step, the first part of the condition is Where.

The second part of the condition is to select the field that you want to use in the condition. Since Frank’s approval is needed for a specific vendor ID, you would select Purchase Order Work Vendor ID.

Next, select a restriction to apply to the field you selected. The restrictions available depend on the type of field you selected. In this case, you would select “is” as your restriction.

After selecting the restriction, determine the comparison. Since Frank’s approval is needed for a specific vendor ID, you would select Constant to use a value instead of a field on the same document.

Then, enter a specific value to use in the condition. For this condition, it would be

ADVENWORK001.

The last step is to choose Add to add the condition to the Conditions list. The condition should look like the following.

where Purchase Order Work.VendorID is ‘ADVENWORK001’

After adding this condition in the Conditions list, the “and” and “or” options are available for the next condition for the workflow step, if applicable.

Assign approvers.

Specify who must approve the documents that reach this step in the workflow.

You can have one approver or multiple approvers. Enter the names of the approvers in the Assign To field.

If you have one approver, that person will be responsible for approving all documents that reach this step in the workflow.

Set a time limit.

Specify how many hours, days, or weeks the approver has to respond to the task—that is, approve or reject it. The number of hours, days, or weeks you enter will be used to calculate the task’s due date.

Mark the Apply Workflow Calendar option to include the Workflow calendar in the due date calculations for the step. For example, assume that you have set up work days in the Workflow calendar as being from Monday to Friday, 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M., and entered four hours as the time limit for a step. If the step is starts at 3:00 P.M. on Wednesday, and the option is marked, then the due date for the task will be set to 10:00 A.M. Thursday morning. If the option is not marked, the due date for the task is set to 7:00 P.M. Wednesday evening.

For detailed information about how a task’s due date is calculated, see

Overview of the

If an approver fails to respond by the due date, the task is considered overdue, or escalated. The task will then be handled according to the option you selected in the When a task is overdue area for the workflow. For more information, see

Indicate what should happen when a task is overdue.

on page 179.

186 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 2 8 C O N F I G U R E A W O R K F L O W S T E P

Send a notification message.

Mark to send e-mail messages to users when workflow tasks are assigned to them. Then, enter or select the message ID for the notification for when the step is run.

You can click the Send Message link to open the Message Setup window, where you can view or edit the message.

Specify the completion policy of a step.

If you have multiple approvers, you must specify how many of the approvers must approve the documents that reach this step. Select one of the following options.

Only one response needed

If you select this option, the action applied to the document is determined by the first person who responds.

For example, assume Sam has submitted a purchase order for $50,000, and it is currently at step 3 in the workflow. If Mary is the first person to respond to the document, the action she takes is applied to the document. For example, if she approves it, the document is sent to Ann for approval. If Mary rejects the document, it is given the status of Rejected and the workflow process is complete.

Sam

submits a purchase order.

Frank

Must approve if greater than

$1,000.

Sue

Must approve if greater than

$5,000.

Bill, Jo, Mary

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

Ann

Must approve if greater than

$20,000.

Majority must approve or take action

If you select this option, a majority of the approvers must approve the document for it to continue down the workflow approval path.

For example, consider the workflow previously illustrated. Assume that Sam has submitted a purchase order for $50,000 and it is currently at step 3 in the workflow.

• If Bill and Jo are the first two approvers to respond—and they both approve the document—the document is sent to Ann for approval. Because a majority is reached, the system does not wait for Mary to respond.

• If Bill and Jo are the first two approvers to respond—and one of the approvers reject the document—the document is given the status of

Rejected and the workflow process is complete. Because a majority is reached, the system does not wait for Mary to respond.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 187

• If Bill approves the document and then Jo requests a change, the document is given the status of Pending User Action. Because a change is requested, the document is immediately sent back to the originator. The system does not wait for Mary to respond.

Keep in mind, if a workflow step has an even number of approvers, a majority must still approve the document in order for it to continue down the workflow approval path. For example, suppose step 3 has four approvers (Bill, Jo, Mary, and Chris). Three approvers must approve the document in order for it to continue down the approval path. If two approvers approve the document, and two reject it, the document is given the Rejected status because a majority was not reached.

All must approve or take action

If you select this option, all of the approvers must approve the document in order for it to continue down the workflow approval path.

For example, consider the workflow previously illustrated. Assume that Sam has submitted a purchase order for $50,000 and it is currently at step 3 in the workflow. If all of the approvers (Bill, Jo, and Mary) approve the document, it is sent to Ann for approval. If one person rejects the document, it is given the status of Rejected and the workflow process is complete. If one person requests a change to the document, it is sent to Sam with a status of Pending User

Action.

10. Choose Save Step.

188 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 29: Set up Workflow delegates

After you’ve set up and activated a workflow in Microsoft Dynamics GP, specify how to delegate workflow tasks to other users.

•

Delegating tasks

Delegating tasks

Approvers can delegate, or reassign, their tasks to other approvers. For example, if

Frank will be out of the office for a period of time, he can delegate his tasks to another approver in the workflow, such as Sue or Ann.

Sam

submits a purchase order.

Frank

Must approve if greater than

$1,000.

Sue

Must approve if greater than

$5,000.

Ann

Must approve if greater than

$10,000.

If users will be out of the office for a period of time, or will be unavailable to respond to tasks, have them delegate their tasks using the following steps.

To delegate tasks:

Open the Workflow User Delegation window.

(Home >> User Preferences >> Workflow Delegation)

Enter or select the user to delegate tasks for.

Mark Automatically delegate my workflow tasks.

Select to delegate all of your workflow types or select to delegate by workflow type.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 189

Inactivating a workflow

For each workflow type that you selected, specify who you want your tasks delegated to.

For each workflow type that you selected, specify when your tasks should be delegated by entering a starting and ending date.

Choose OK.

If users will be out of the office for a period of time, or unavailable to respond to tasks, have them delegate their tasks. For more information, see Chapter 15,

“Workflow tasks.”

190 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 30: Workflow maintenance

The following sections explain how to copy, modify, delete, and inactivate a workflow.

•

Copying a workflow

•

Modifying a workflow

•

Deleting a workflow

•

•

Troubleshooting Workflow

Copying a workflow

An easy way to create a new workflow is to copy an existing one and modify it, as necessary. When you copy an existing workflow definition using the Copy

Workflow window, you will copy all the steps included in the existing workflow.

You also can copy a workflow from one company to another.

To copy a workflow:

Open the Workflow Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Workflow >>Workflow

Maintenance)

Select the series that has the workflow you want to copy.

Expand the workflow type in the tree view.

Select the workflow you want to copy.

Choose the Copy button to open the Copy Workflow window.

Enter a unique name for the workflow.

We recommend that the name include your company name and the type of document the workflow is for. For example, if you’re configuring a workflow for purchase orders created in the Fabrikam sample company, you may want to name the workflow “Fabrikam Purchase Orders.”

Enter the description of the workflow.

Select the company this workflow is for.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 191

“Configure a workflow” and

You can copy this workflow to the company you are currently working in, or you can copy the workflow to another company.

Choose Copy.

Modifying a workflow

Use the following steps to modify a workflow. Once documents have been submitted to the workflow, you can no longer add, remove, or change the order of steps.

Open the Workflow Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Workflow >>Workflow

Maintenance)

Select the series that has the workflow you want to modify.

Expand the workflow type in the tree view.

Select the workflow you want to modify.

Modify the workflow, as necessary.

For more information about each of the options in the window, see

Chapter 27,

Chapter 28, “Configure a workflow step.”

Choose Save Workflow.

Deleting a workflow

To delete a workflow you’re no longer using, use the following steps.

You cannot delete a workflow that has an instance started.

To delete a workflow:

Open the Workflow Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Workflow >>Workflow

Maintenance)

Select the series that has the workflow you want to delete.

Expand the workflow type in the tree view.

Select the workflow you want to delete.

Choose Delete Workflow.

Inactivating a workflow

Use the Workflow Maintenance window to inactivate a workflow that you no longer use. If documents are submitted before inactivating the workflow, the documents continue through the original workflow until they are complete.

192 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 0 W O R K F L O W M A I N T E N A N C E

When you inactivate a workflow, the message bar and workflow related buttons that appeared in the associated entry window are removed, assuming that you haven’t activated another workflow. For example, the message bar that appeared in the Purchase Order Entry window would be removed.

Before you make a workflow inactive, you may want to process the documents that are awaiting approval.

To inactivate a workflow:

Open the Workflow Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Workflow >>Workflow

Maintenance)

Select the series that has the workflow you want to inactivate.

Expand the workflow type in the tree view.

Select the workflow you want to inactivate.

Unmark the Active option.

Choose Save Workflow.

Troubleshooting Workflow

Review the following information.

Escalation actions are not performed

Be sure that the SQL Server Agent service is set up to start automatically with the operating system.

The default daily frequency for a SQL Server job is every 15 minutes. This means that the SQL Server job that performs escalations only runs every 15 minutes, unless you changed the default daily frequency. The escalation may happen up to 15 minutes after the due date and time passes.

Cannot perform Workflow actions from e-mail notifications

Be sure that you have installed Microsoft Dynamics GP Web Services and that the application user account set up in Microsoft Dynamics GP Web Services is a domain account that has privileges to access Active Directory.

Verify that the browser you are using is a supported browser.

An error occurs when submitting a document

If an error occurs when submitting a document after you restore a SQL Server backup to a new server or you have upgraded to a newer version of Microsoft .NET

Framework, you must execute the wfDeployClrAssemblies stored procedure.

Open the SQL Server Management Studio.

In the Object Explorer, expand the Microsoft Dynamics GP system database.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 193

Chapter 31, “Organizational levels and entities,” explains how to define the

Expand Programmability and then expand Stored Procedures.

Right-click on dbo.wfDeployClrAssemblies and click Execute Stored Procedure.

194 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Part 6: Organizational structure

You can define as many as four layers of structure within your business, and then to set up specific divisions, departments, or other organizational groups. Later you can create relationships among different groups. You can assign accounts, users, and user classes to different parts of the organizational structure.

This part of the documentation includes:

•

components of your organizational structure.

•

Chapter 32, “Organizational relationships,” describes how to define the

association between levels and entities in your organization.

•

Chapter 33, “User and user class assignments,” shows how to assign users and

user classes to the organizational structure you have created.

•

Chapter 34, “Account assignments,” explains how to assign both individual

accounts and account ranges to your organizational structure.

•

Chapter 35, “Account security,” describes how to activate account security and

provides information on the effects of account security.

196 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 31: Organizational levels and entities

Setting up organizational levels and entities involves defining the components of your organization. This information describes how to add, delete, and rename levels and entities in your organizational structure.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Understanding organizational levels and entities

•

Defining levels and entities

•

Adding a level to an organizational structure

•

Deleting a level in an organizational structure

•

Adding an entity in an organizational structure

•

Deleting an entity in an organizational structure

•

Renaming levels and entities in an organizational structure

Understanding organizational levels and entities

Your organization might be defined in various ways, such as by geographic regions, functional areas, product lines, or target markets. For example, your organization might be composed of a number of companies, each with its own set of product lines and departments. Each level of the organization—in this example, company, product line, and department—includes a number of entities, that is, distinct identifiable units. For example, the entities at the department level might include the following:

• Purchasing

• Facility management

• Accounting

• Production

Defining levels and entities

Use the Organizational Structure Setup window to establish the levels of your organization and the entities at each level within the organizational structure. You can define up to four levels and up to 256 entities at each level. For example, the four levels could be Company, Region, Division, and Department, and the entities at the Department level could be Manufacturing, Distribution, Research, and

Marketing.

Take some time before you begin the actual setup and think about the way your organization works. Using your existing organizational chart is an excellent place to begin.

Be sure you’ve identified each of the units in all of your companies. The levels and entities you create in this window will be used for all of your Microsoft Dynamics GP companies.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 197

P A R T 6

To define levels and entities:

Open the Organizational Structure Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Organizational Structure)

Enter a label for each organizational level you want to use. The labels you enter for each of the levels will appear throughout Microsoft Dynamics GP. You can change these labels at any time.

You don’t have to enter labels for all four levels if you don’t need them all. For example, if you have only one company and your organization includes regions, divisions, and departments, you could enter those labels for levels 1, 2, and 3 and leave level 4 blank. If you leave a level blank, you won’t be able to enter any entities in it, and it won’t appear anywhere in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

Enter an ID and a description for each entity that exists at each level of your organization. You can change entity IDs and descriptions at any time.

Verify your entries with the Organizational Structure Setup Report.

Use the Organizational Structure Setup Report to verify that you have entered labels for each of the levels you’ll use, and that you’ve entered IDs and descriptions for each entity in your organization. You can print this report while the Organizational Structure Setup window is open by choosing File >> Print.

Choose OK to save your entries.

Adding a level to an organizational structure

Use the Organizational Structure Setup window to add levels to your organizational structure. You can add levels at any time.

To add a level to an organizational structure:

Open the Organizational Structure Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Organizational Structure)

Enter the label of the level you want to add. When you create a new level, you’ll need to add entities to that level.

Choose OK to save your changes.

198 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 1 O R G A N I Z A T I O N A L L E V E L S A N D E N T I T I E S

Deleting a level in an organizational structure

Use the Organizational Structure Setup window to delete levels from your organizational structure. You can delete levels at any time.

To delete a level in an organizational structure:

Open the Organizational Structure Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Organizational Structure)

Delete the label of the level to remove. If a level does not have a label, you won’t be able to create any entities in it, and it won’t appear anywhere in Microsoft

Dynamics GP.

You can’t delete a level if any entities exist in it or if any levels exist below it in the organizational structure.

Choose OK to save your changes.

Adding an entity in an organizational structure

Use the Organizational Structure Setup window to add entities to the organizational structure. You can add entities at any time.

To add an entity in an organizational structure:

Open the Organizational Structure Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Organizational Structure)

Choose the level to add entities to.

Enter an ID and a description for each entity you want to add to your organizational structure. You can change entity IDs and descriptions at any time.

Choose OK to save your changes.

Deleting an entity in an organizational structure

Use the Organizational Structure Setup window to delete entities from the organizational structure. You can delete entities at any time.

If you have created an organizational structure and assigned users, user classes, and accounts to positions in the organization, deleting an entity will have the following effects:

• Any relationships that exist for that entity will be removed.

• Any existing Organizational Structure assignments for users, user classes, and accounts assigned to those relationships will be removed.

Users and user classes can be assigned to only one position in the organizational structure; therefore, user and user classes assigned to removed positions will not have access to any accounts until they are assigned to a different position.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 199

P A R T 6

Understanding organizational relationships

Accounts can be assigned to multiple positions in the organizational structure; therefore, accounts assigned to positions that are removed may still be assigned to other positions.

To delete an entity in an organizational structure:

Open the Organizational Structure Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Organizational Structure)

Choose the level you want to delete an entity from.

Select the entity you want to delete and choose Edit >> Delete Row. Any relationships associated with this entity will be removed.

You can delete an entity at any time; however, if it is part of a parent-child relationship—that is, if it has any entities below it in the structure—any relationships below it also will be deleted. (Only the relationship will be deleted, not the child entities.)

Choose OK to save your changes.

Renaming levels and entities in an organizational structure

Use the Organizational Structure Setup window to rename levels and entities. You can change the labels for the levels of your organization and change the IDs and descriptions of the entities at each level within the organizational structure.

To rename levels and entities in an organizational structure:

Open the Organizational Structure Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Organizational Structure)

Change the labels for your organization levels.

Change the IDs and descriptions for the entities at each level.

Verify your entries with the Organizational Structure Setup Report. To print the report, choose File >> Print.

Choose OK to save your changes.

200 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 32: Organizational relationships

Setting up organizational relationships involves defining the association between levels and entities in your organization. This information describes how to set up relationships in your organizational structure. You can then use this structure as a basis for defining account security and assigning users and accounts to entities.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

•

Defining organizational relationships

•

Copying organizational relationships

•

Examples of copying organizational relationships

•

Adding organizational relationships

•

Removing an organizational relationship

Understanding organizational relationships

Organizational relationships define the association between levels and entities in your organization. Organizational relationships are defined in terms of parent/ child relationships. For example, a company’s East region may have a Products division and a Services division; the East region is a parent entity, and the Products and Services divisions are child entities.

Parent/child relationships must be defined in a “top-down” manner—that is, you must begin with a level 1 entity and assign the level 2 entities that are its children.

You can then assign the level 3 child entities for a level 2 parent, so on.

You can copy the relationships you’ve defined for one entity to another entity, or to all other entities at the same level. For example, assume you have a Company/Division/Department structure, and all your companies have a Hardware division with a Production department.

You could create the appropriate parent/child relationships in one company, and copy that set of relationships to all other companies in your organization. For more information, refer to

Copying organizational relationships on page 203.

Defining organizational relationships

Use the Organizational Tree window and the Define Entity Relationships window to define the parent/child relationships among the entities in your organization.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 201

P A R T 6

Examples of copying organizational relationships

To define organizational relationships:

Open the Organizational Tree window.

(Administration >> Cards >> System >> Organizational Tree)

Highlight the parent entity to which you want to define relationships.

When you first open this window, all of the level 1 entities you defined in the

Organizational Structure Setup window will appear in the tree view. If some relationships have been defined, a plus sign (+) will appear next to the entity.

Click the plus sign to expand the tree view.

When the Organizational Tree window is open, you can use the buttons in the window to create, copy, or delete relationships, or you can use the selections on the Relationships menu.

Choose the Define Relationship button (or choose Relationships >> Define

Relationship) to open the Define Entity Relationships window.

Mark the entities to be children of the selected parent.

All unassigned entities that exist in the level below the entity you selected in the

Organizational Tree window will appear in this window. If an entity has already been assigned to the selected parent entity, it will not appear in this window. For example, if you have already assigned the North and South

202 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 2 O R G A N I Z A T I O N A L R E L A T I O N S H I P S

Regions to Company A, only the East and West regions will appear in this window.

Choose Process to create the relationships and update the entities displayed in the Organizational Tree window.

When the organizational tree displayed in the Organizational Tree window is updated, only the level 1 entities are displayed. Click the plus sign to expand the tree view.

In the Organizational Tree window, select another entity and continue defining relationships.

Copying organizational relationships

If you have a basic structure that appears throughout your organization, you can create the appropriate parent/child relationships once, and copy that structure to the rest of your organization. You can copy the relationships from one entity to another entity or to all the entities at the same level. If you’re copying to entities that have already been assigned relationships, you can choose to add to the existing structure, or replace it with the new structure. You also can specify to copy specific level-2 or level-3 relationships. For more information on copying relationships, see

on page 205.

Use caution when copying relationships to entities with existing structures. Be sure you don’t add or replace relationships that you don’t intend to add or replace.

To copy organizational relationships:

Open the Organizational Tree window.

(Administration >> Cards >> System >> Organizational Tree)

Highlight the relationship to copy.

You can select a level 1, 2, or 3 entity. For example, if you have a Company/

Region/Division/Department structure and want to copy every parent/child relationship under the company ACME, highlight that company. If you want to copy the relationships below ACME company and region EAST, expand the

ACME branch and select EAST.

If you’re copying a portion of the organizational structure that has accounts assigned to it, those accounts will not be assigned to the new structure.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 203

P A R T 6

Choose the Copy Relationship button (or choose Relationships >> Copy

Relationships) to open the Copy Organizational Structures window.

The Copy From fields display information from the entity that you selected in the Organizational Tree window. For example, suppose you expand the tree and choose a level 3 entity of a specific branch. Then the three Copy From fields displays information about the appropriate parent and child entities. These values can be changed.

Decide if you want to copy the relationship to all entities or to a specific one.

• If you’re copying to all entities, the relationship will be copied only to entities that exist at the lowest level entered in the Copy From fields—that is, if you specify a level 3 entity to copy from, the relationships will be copied only to existing level 3 entities.

• If you want to select a specific entity to copy to, you must specify entities in the Copy To fields at each of the levels entered in the Copy From fields— that is, if you specify a level 3 entity to copy from, you must specify a level 3 entity in the Copy To fields.

You also can choose to add the relationship to existing structures, or you can replace the existing structures with the specified relationship.

Choose the Copy button to begin copying the selected relationships. When the copying process is finished, the window will remain open and you’ll be able to select more relationships to copy.

When you’ve finished copying entities, close the window.

204 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 2 O R G A N I Z A T I O N A L R E L A T I O N S H I P S

Examples of copying organizational relationships

For all of the following examples, assume you have a structure with Company at the first level, Division at the second, and Department at the third, with three companies: Fabrikam, Fabrikam–United Kingdom, and Fabrikam–Canada.

Copying a level 1 relationship to all entities

Assume you’ve created the following structure for Fabrikam:

Fabrikam

Hardware

Administration

Consulting

Production

Research

Sales

If all three companies have a Hardware division that includes the same departments, you could copy the entire structure of Fabrikam to both other companies. In the Organizational Tree window, select Fabrikam, then choose the

Copy Relationship button. In the Copy Organizational Structures window, mark

Copy to All Entity IDs and choose Copy. The following structure would be created

Fabrikam

Hardware

Administration

Consulting

Production

Research

Fabrikam–UK

Sales

Hardware

Administration

Consulting

Production

Research

Sales

Fabrikam–CAN

Hardware

Administration

Consulting

Production

Research

Sales

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 205

P A R T 6

Assigning shortcuts to a new user class folder

Copying one level 2 relationship to another

Assume you have created the structure for Fabrikam with a Hardware division that includes several departments.

Also, assume the UK company has a Hardware division, but the Canada company has a Software division, and you want to copy the departments under Fabrikam/

Hardware to both the Hardware division of the UK company and the Software division of the Canada company. You can do this by first adding the Hardware division to the UK company and the Software division to the Canada company. The following table illustrates the structures you’d need to define before copying relationships.

Fabrikam

Hardware

Administration

Consulting

Production

Research

Fabrikam–UK

Sales

Hardware

Fabrikam–CAN

Software

After you’ve created this structure, you can copy the relationships from Fabrikam/

Hardware. In the Organizational Tree window, select Fabrikam, then select

Hardware and choose the Copy Relationship button. In the Copy Organizational

Structures window, mark Copy to All Entity IDs, and choose Copy. The following structure will be created:

Fabrikam

Hardware

Administration

Consulting

Production

Research

Fabrikam–UK

Sales

Hardware

Administration

Consulting

Production

Research

Sales

Fabrikam–CAN

Software

Administration

Consulting

Production

Research

Sales

You also can copy the departments for Fabrikam/Hardware only to the Software division of Fabrikam–Canada. In the Organizational Tree window, select Fabrikam, then select Hardware and choose the Copy Relationship button to open the Copy

Organizational Structures window. In the Copy To fields, select Fabrikam–Canada and Software, and choose Copy.

206 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 2 O R G A N I Z A T I O N A L R E L A T I O N S H I P S

Adding organizational relationships

Use the Organizational Tree window and the Define Entity Relationships window to add parent/child relationships to the entities in your organization.

To add organizational relationships:

Open the Organizational Tree window.

(Administration >> Cards >> System >> Organizational Tree)

Select the parent entity to which you want to add relationships.

Choose the Define Relationships button (or choose Relationships >> Define

Relationship) to open the Define Entity Relationships window.

Mark the child entities to add.

Choose Process to update the entities displayed in the Organizational Tree window.

Removing an organizational relationship

Use the Organizational Tree window and the Define Entity Relationships window to remove parent/child relationships from the entities in your organization.

Because relationships are defined in a “top-down” manner, changes made to a parent entity can affect its child entities. For example, if you remove a parent/child relationship, all the relationships below that are lost. You can’t move a branch—that is, a child entity that has other child entities below it—from one parent entity to another and preserve the relationships below it.

Removing an organizational relationship will delete the organizational structure for the users and accounts assigned to that relationship. Because a user can be assigned to only one position, any user assigned to a position that is removed will not be able to access any accounts. Accounts can be assigned to more than one position, so an account assigned to a position that is removed may still be assigned to other positions.

To remove an organizational relationship:

Open the Organizational Tree window.

(Administration >> Cards >> System >> Organizational Tree)

Select the child entity you want to remove from the relationship. You can expand a branch of the organizational tree by choosing the plus sign next to a parent entity.

Choose Delete Relationship (or choose Relationships >> Delete Relationships).

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 207

208 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 33: User and user class assignments

This information describes how to create user classes and assign users and user classes to the organizational structure you’ve created. You must assign user and user classes before you can activate account level security.

You can create user classes and assign them to an organizational entity in your organizational structure so that you can activate account level security.

You also can specify sets of specific shortcuts to common tasks for each user class with the shortcut bar. Each set of shortcuts will appear on the user’s shortcut bar in

a user class folder. See

on page 51 for

instructions on creating a user class shortcut folder.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Creating a user class

•

Assigning users to a class

•

Assigning a user class to an organizational entity

•

Changing the assignment of a user class

•

How rolling down changes affects users in a class

•

Assigning a user to an organizational structure

•

Changing the assignment of a user

For information about assigning accounts to the organizational structure, see

Chapter 34, “Account assignments.”

Creating a user class

You’ll use the User Class Setup window to create a user class.

To create a user class:

Open the User Class Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User Classes)

In the Class ID field, enter a class name. You may find it helpful to enter a name that identifies this class, such as SUPERVISOR or DATA ENTRY.

If you use Organizational Structures, choose the Class ID organization button to open the Organizational Structure Assignment window, where you can assign the selected user class to a position in your organizational structure.

Enter a description that identifies the class further. This description will be used as the name of the shortcut bar folder that corresponds to this user class.

To print a User Classes Report, showing the information you entered for the selected record, choose File >> Print. You also can print this report using the

User Report Options window.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 209

P A R T 6

one at a time. For more information, see How rolling down changes affects users in a class on page 212.

Assigning users to a class

After creating your user classes, assign each user to a class using the User Setup window.

To assign users to a class:

Open the User Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User)

Enter or select a user.

In the Class ID field, enter or select the class you want to assign the user to.

Mark the Default option if you want the settings that you enter for this class to automatically appear as the default for every subsequent class that you create.

Choose Save to save your changes.

Assigning a user class to an organizational entity

Use the Organizational Structure Assignment window to assign a user class to a position in the organizational structure. You can assign a user class to only one position in the organizational structure.

If you have a large number of users, we recommend that you use user classes to assign groups of them to positions in the organizational structure. If you do need to make changes to the structure, you’ll be able to apply those changes to all the users in a class, rather than

Only the system administrator, and users granted full access to all accounts can assign a user class to the organizational structure. (Full access to accounts can be granted to users and user classes in the Organizational Structure Assignment window.)

210 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 3 U S E R A N D U S E R C L A S S A S S I G N M E N T S

To assign a user class to an organizational entity:

Open the User Class Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User Classes)

Enter or select the user class to assign to the organizational structure, and choose the organization icon button to open the Organizational Structure

Assignment window.

If members of this user class should have access to all accounts, mark Grant

Access To All Accounts.

Enter or select the entities that specify the position to assign the user class to.

The position you specify for this user class must already exist in the organizational structure. You can view the existing organizational structure in the Organizational

Tree window (Administration >> Cards >> System >> Organizational Tree). For more information, see

Defining organizational relationships on page 201.

As you enter the entities, you also are selecting the position in the organizational structure you’re assigning the user class to. For example, if to assign the user class to the Consulting department of the Hardware division of

Fabrikam, you would enter Fabrikam in the first level, Hardware in the second level and Consulting in the third level.

Choose Insert to insert the position into the Assigned Positions list.

Choose OK to save the position assignment.

Changing the assignment of a user class

Use the Organizational Structure Assignment window to change a user class’s position in the organizational structure. You can assign a user class to only one position in the organizational structure.

If you have a large number of users, changing the assignment for a user class is an easy way to change the position assignments for several users at once, rather than

one at a time. For more information, see

How rolling down changes affects users in a class

on page 212.

Only the system administrator and users granted full access to all accounts can change a user class’s position in the organizational structure. (Full access to

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 211

P A R T 6

Assigning a user to an organizational structure on page 212.

accounts is granted to users and user classes in the Organizational Structure

Assignment window.)

To change the assignment of a user class:

Open the User Class Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User Classes)

Enter or select the user class whose position in the organizational structure you want to change, and choose the organization icon button to open the

Organizational Structure Assignment window.

If members of this user class should have access to all accounts, mark Grant

Access To All Accounts.

Highlight the current position assignment of the user class and choose Remove.

Because a user class can’t be assigned to more than one position, you must first remove its current position assignment before selecting a new one.

Enter or select the entities that specify the new position to assign the user class to.

As you enter the entities, you also are selecting the position in the organizational structure you’re assigning the user class to. For example, if you want to assign the user class to the Production department of the Eastern region of Fabrikam, you would enter Fabrikam in the first level, East in the second level and Production in the third level.

Choose Insert to insert the position into the Assigned Positions list.

Choose OK to save the position assignment.

How rolling down changes affects users in a class

When you make changes to the organizational assignment for a user class, you’ll have the option to apply those changes to the user records assigned to that class. If you roll down changes, all the changes you make will apply to all the users in the class.

Rolling down changes applies all the settings for a user class, not just those that you changed in an individual session.

If you roll down changes for a class, any individual position assignments you’ve made for users in that class will be lost. For more information on position assignments for individual users, see

If you choose not to roll down changes, the changes won’t affect any existing users but will be reflected in the settings for all users you assign to this class in the future.

Assigning a user to an organizational structure

Use the Organizational Structure Assignment window to assign a user to a position in the organizational structure. You can assign a user to only one position in the organizational structure.

212 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 3 U S E R A N D U S E R C L A S S A S S I G N M E N T S

If you have a large number of users, we recommend that you use user classes to assign groups of users to positions in the organizational structure. For more information, see

Assigning a user class to an organizational entity on page 210.

Only the system administrator and users granted full access to all accounts can assign a user to the organizational structure. (Full access to accounts can be granted to users and user classes in the Organizational Structure Assignment window.)

To assign a user to an organizational structure:

Open the User Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User)

Enter or select the user you want to assign to the organizational structure, and choose the organization icon button to open the Organizational Structure

Assignment window.

If the user should have access to all accounts, mark Grant Access To All

Accounts.

Enter or select the entities that specify the position to assign the user to.

The position you specify for this user must already exist in the organizational structure.

You can view the existing organizational structure in the Organizational Tree window

(Administration >> Cards >> System >> Organizational Tree). For more information, see

Defining organizational relationships on page 201.

As you enter the entities, you also are selecting the position in the organizational structure you’re assigning the user to. For example, if you want

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 213

P A R T 6

Assigning a range of accounts to an entity

to assign the user to the Consulting department of the Hardware division of

Fabrikam, you would enter Fabrikam in the first level, Hardware in the second level and Consulting in the third level.

Choose Insert to insert the position into the Assigned Positions list.

Choose OK to save the position assignment.

Changing the assignment of a user

Use the Organizational Structure Assignment window to change a user’s position in the organizational structure. You can assign a user to only one position in the organizational structure.

Only the system administrator and users granted full access to all accounts can change a user’s position in the organizational structure. (Full access to accounts is granted to users and user classes in the Organizational Structure Assignment window.)

To change the assignment of a user:

Open the User Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> User)

Enter or select the user whose position in the organizational structure you want to change, and choose the organization icon button to open the Organizational

Structure Assignment window.

Indicate whether this user should have access to all accounts, regardless of their position in the organizational structure.

Highlight the user’s current position assignment and choose Remove.

Because a user can’t be assigned to more than one position, you must first remove their current position assignment before selecting a new one.

Enter or select the entities that specify the new position to assign the user to.

As you enter the entities, you also are selecting the position in the organizational structure you’re assigning the user to. For example, to assign a user to the Production department of the Eastern region of Fabrikam, you would enter Fabrikam in the first level, East in the second level and Production in the third level.

Choose Insert to insert the position into the Assigned Positions list.

Choose OK to save the position assignment.

214 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 34: Account assignments

After assigning users to the organizational structure you’ve created, you must assign accounts to the structure. This information describes how to assign individual accounts and ranges of accounts. Then, when you activate account level security, users will be able to access only those accounts that they are assigned to, based on their position in the organizational structure.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

•

Changing the assignment for a range of accounts

•

Assigning an account to an organizational entity

•

Changing the assignment of an account

Assigning a range of accounts to an entity

Use the Organizational Structure Mass Assignment window to assign a range of accounts to a position in the organizational structure. You can assign accounts to more than one position in the organizational structure.

You can assign posting accounts, unit accounts, and variable and fixed allocation accounts to positions in the organizational structure. You also can allow users to have access to an allocation account—either fixed or variable—while not allowing them to have access to any of the distribution or breakdown accounts for the allocation account.

If you activate account security and you have accounts that aren’t assigned to at least one position in the organizational tree, those accounts will be available only to users who have been given access to all accounts.

Only the system administrator and users granted full access to all accounts can assign a range of accounts to the organizational structure. (Full access to accounts can be granted to users and user classes in the Organizational Structure Assignment window.) For more information on granting users and user classes access to all accounts, see

Chapter 33, “User and user class assignments.”

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 215

P A R T 6

Tree). For more information, see Defining organizational relationships on page 201.

To assign a range of accounts to an entity:

Open the Organizational Structure Mass Assignment window.

(Administration >> Cards >> System >> Organizational Assignments)

Enter or select the entities that specify the position to which you want to assign the range of accounts.

The position you specify for this range of accounts must already exist in the organizational structure. You can view the existing organizational structure in the

Organizational Tree window (Administration >> Cards >> System >> Organizational

As you enter the entities, you also are selecting the position in the organizational structure to which you’re assigning the range of accounts. For example, to assign accounts to the Sales department of the Hardware division of Fabrikam, you would enter Fabrikam in the first level, Hardware in the second level and Sales in the third.

Select the ID of the company to which you’re making account assignments.

If you are using Intercompany Processing and want account security to apply to transactions originating in another company, you must assign the appropriate accounts in the originating company to the organizational structure.

Select Assign, and indicate whether you want the assigned accounts to be available to the parent levels of the entity.

Using the previous example, if you enter the organizational structure The

Fabrikam/Hardware/Sales and select the Apply To Parent Levels option, the accounts you enter will be available to users and user classes assigned to the following three positions of the structure:

• Fabrikam/Hardware/Sales

• Fabrikam/Hardware

• Fabrikam

If you leave the option unmarked, the accounts will be available only to users and user classes assigned to Fabrikam/Hardware/Sales.

216 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 4 A C C O U N T A S S I G N M E N T S

Select the type of range of accounts to assign—segment or account—then enter restrictions for that range. You can insert multiple ranges of each type into the

Restrictions list.

If you insert multiple ranges into the Restrictions list, any account that falls within one of the ranges you define will be assigned. For example, you could choose to restrict by segments, and enter Account segment 1200 through 1270 and Account segment 1300 through 1330 in the Restrictions list. Any account with segments 1200 to 1270 or 1300 to 1330 will be assigned.

If you use a segment range to assign accounts to a position in the organizational structure, then later add accounts that fall within that range, the new accounts will not be assigned automatically to the same position. You must add the new accounts to the structure.

Choose Details to open the Organizational Assignment Details window, where you can view the accounts that fall within the ranges you selected, and make changes if necessary.

In this window, you can select individual accounts to exclude from the ranges you defined. When you finish, choose OK to return to the Organizational

Structure Mass Assignment window.

Choose Process.

After processing is completed, the Organizational Assignments Journal will print, showing the account restrictions you entered, the assignment options, the position you assigned accounts to, and the accounts that were assigned.

Changing the assignment for a range of accounts

Use the Organizational Structure Mass Assignment window to change the organizational structure assignments for a range of accounts. You can assign additional ranges of accounts to the position, remove specific ranges of accounts from the position, or remove specific ranges of accounts from all assigned positions for the selected company.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 217

P A R T 6

Assigning a range of accounts to an entity

To change the assignment for a range of accounts:

Open the Organizational Structure Mass Assignment window.

(Administration >> Cards >> System >> Organizational Assignments)

Enter or select the entities that specify the position to which you want to change account assignments.

If you want to remove specific ranges of accounts from all assigned positions for the selected company, you can leave these fields blank.

As you enter the entities, you also are selecting the position in the organizational structure to which you’re assigning the range of accounts. For example, if you want to change the ranges of accounts that will be available to the Production department of the Eastern region of Fabrikam, you would enter

Fabrikam in the first level, East in the second level and Production in the third level.

Select the ID of the company to which you’re changing account assignments.

You can assign additional ranges of accounts to the position, remove specific ranges of accounts from the position, or remove specific ranges of accounts from all assigned positions for the selected company.

• To assign additional ranges of accounts to the position, choose Assign, and indicate whether you want the assigned accounts to be available to the parent levels of the entity. Then select the type of range you want to assign, and enter restrictions for the range of accounts. For more information, see

on page 215.

• To remove specific ranges of accounts from the position, choose Remove

Assigned, and indicate whether you want the assigned accounts to be removed from the parent levels of the entity. Then select the type of range you want to remove, and enter restrictions for the range of accounts.

• To remove specific ranges of accounts from all assigned positions for the selected company, choose Remove All Assigned, then select the type of range to remove, and enter restrictions for the range of accounts.

Choose Details to open the Organizational Assignment Details window, where you can view the accounts that fall within the ranges you selected, and make changes if necessary.

Choose OK to return to the Organizational Structure Mass Assignment window.

Choose Process. Processing your selections may take some time, depending on the number of accounts in the ranges you specified.

Assigning an account to an organizational entity

Use the Organizational Structure Assignment window to assign an account to positions in the organizational structure. You can assign an account to more than one position in the organizational structure.

You can assign posting accounts, unit accounts, and variable and fixed allocation accounts to positions in the organizational structure. You also can allow users to

218 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 4 A C C O U N T A S S I G N M E N T S have access to an allocation account—either fixed or variable—while not allowing them to have access to any of the distribution or breakdown accounts for the allocation account.

To assign an account to an organizational entity:

Open one of the account maintenance windows.

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Account)

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Unit Account)

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Variable Allocation)

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Fixed Allocation)

Enter or select the account to assign to the organizational structure.

Choose the organization icon button to open the Organizational Structure

Assignment window.

Enter or select the entities that specify the position to which you want to assign the account.

As you enter the entities, you also are selecting the position in the organizational structure to which you’re assigning the account. For example, to assign an account that will be available to the Hardware division of Fabrikam, you would enter Fabrikam in the first level and Hardware in the second level.

Choose Insert to insert the position into the Assigned Positions list. When you insert the position into the Assigned Positions list, a message will appear, asking if you want to make this account available to the parent levels of the organization.

You can assign an account to more than one position in the organization at a time.

Choose OK to save the position assignments.

Changing the assignment of an account

Use the Organizational Structure Assignment window to change the position assignment of an account. You can assign an account to more than one position in the organizational structure.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 219

P A R T 6

Activating account security

To change the assignment of an account:

Open one of the account maintenance windows.

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Account)

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Unit Account)

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Variable Allocation)

(Financial >> Cards >> Financial >> Fixed Allocation)

Enter or select the account to which you want to change the position assignment.

Choose the organization icon button to open the Organizational Structure

Assignment window.

Enter or select the entities that specify the position to which you want to assign the account.

As you enter entities, you also are selecting the position in the organizational structure to which you’re assigning the account. For example, to assign an account to the Hardware division of Fabrikam, you would enter Fabrikam in the first level and Hardware in the second level.

You can assign an account to more than one position in the organization at a time.

To remove a position assignment, select it in the Assigned Positions list and choose Remove.

Choose OK to save the position assignments.

220 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 35: Account security

This information describes how to use account security and explains the effects of account security. Once you activate account security, users will be able to use only those accounts to which they have been given access.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

•

Effects of account security on transactions

•

Effects of account security on inquiries

•

Effects of account security on reports and report options

•

Effects of account security on maintenance windows

•

Effects of account security on secured windows

Activating account security

The organizational structure you create—including the user, user class, and account assignments—won’t take effect until you activate account security in the Company

Setup window. You must activate account security separately for each of the companies you create in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

Account security settings will take effect for each user when the user logs into the system after account security has been activated.

Before beginning this procedure, be sure you’re logged in to the company to which you want to activate account security.

To activate account security:

Open the Company Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Company)

Mark the Account Security option.

Choose OK to save your settings. When you’ve finished, close the window.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 221

P A R T 6

Chapter 36, “Business Alerts overview,” contains information about how

Effects of account security on transactions

Once you activate account security, you can’t enter, view, edit, or post any transactions in General Ledger windows that include a secured account—that is, an account to which you don’t have access.

When you use the transaction entry windows in Receivables Management, Payables

Management, Sales Order Processing, Invoicing, Inventory Control, Intercompany

Processing, Payroll, Purchase Order Processing, and Bank Reconciliation, you can enter, view, and edit transactions that include default distributions to secured accounts. However, account security will apply to account distributions. You can open the distribution entry windows, but if any accounts are secured—not available to you—the account field will be blank and the message “Access denied/Account missing” will appear in the Description field. If you attempt to enter an account number that is secured, the message “You don’t have permission to create new accounts or view all accounts” will appear when you move from the field. The account and description fields will be cleared.

If you attempt to post a transaction in a module other than General Ledger that includes a secured account, the batch will not be posted—it will not post through General Ledger, even if the Post Through General Ledger Files option for the series is marked in the Posting Setup window. A user who has access to all accounts will have to use the Batch Recovery window to mark the batch and continue the posting process.

When you enter or edit a transaction in any of the transaction entry windows, if any of the distribution accounts are secured, they will be saved when you save the transaction. A user with access to those accounts or a user with access to all accounts could view the transaction and all of the account distributions.

If a transaction includes Multidimensional Analysis information and you remove a distribution for a secured account, any Multidimensional Analysis information associated with that distribution also will be removed. (When an account distribution is deleted for any reason, the Multidimensional Analysis information associated with the distribution will be removed, whether it is a secured account or not.)

Effects of account security on inquiries

Account security will apply to all account fields in the inquiry windows in all modules. If you don’t have full access to all accounts, you won’t be able to view secured accounts by using an account lookup, by using the browse buttons, by entering a secured account number, or by zooming from an account field on another window.

When you use an inquiry window that includes an account field you can view records that include secured accounts. However, the account field will be blank and the message “Access denied/Account missing” will appear in the Description field.

If you attempt to enter an account number that is secured, the message “You don’t have permission to create new accounts or view all accounts” will appear when you move from the field. The account and description fields will be cleared.

222 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 5 A C C O U N T S E C U R I T Y

Effects of account security on reports and report options

Account security applies to all reports in all modules. If you don’t have full access to all accounts, you won’t be able to create a report that includes secured accounts.

In the report options windows, if you don’t have full access to all accounts, you won’t be able to restrict the report using a secured account number.

Effects of account security on maintenance windows

Only the system administrator and users granted full access to all accounts will be able to create new accounts in the account maintenance windows in General Ledger.

Account security applies to all account fields in the maintenance windows in all modules. If you don’t have full access to all accounts, you won’t be able to view secured accounts by using an account lookup, by using the browse buttons, or by entering a secured account number. If you open a record that includes a secured account, the account field will be blank and the message “Access denied/Account missing” will appear in the Description field. If you attempt to enter an account number that is secured, the message “You don’t have permission to create new accounts or view all accounts” will appear when you move from the field. The account and description fields will be cleared.

Effects of account security on secured windows

Some Microsoft Dynamics GP windows can be opened only if you have full access to all accounts. These windows include the Year-End Closing window, the Period

Consolidation window, the Reconcile Financial Information window, and the remove history windows for all modules.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 223

224 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Part 7: Business Alerts

You can use this information to set up Business Alerts to notify you when your data matches conditions you specify. The Business Alert information is designed to give you an in-depth understanding of how to use the features of Business Alerts, and how Business Alerts integrates with the Microsoft Dynamics GP system.

This part of the documentation contains the following information:

•

Business Alerts works.

•

Chapter 37, “Business Alerts setup,” contains information about setting up

Business Alerts.

•

Chapter 38, “Business Alerts maintenance,” contains information about

maintaining Business Alerts.

226 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 36: Business Alerts overview

Business Alerts uses the power of Microsoft SQL Server to monitor your business’s data, delivering faster access to business-critical information and enabling your organization to make quicker, more informed decisions to improve your business success.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

How Business Alerts works

•

Alert notifications

•

Business Alerts terms

How Business Alerts works

Business Alerts takes advantage of the query features of Microsoft SQL Server to monitor your data for specific conditions. For example, suppose that you want to be notified when a customer’s credit limit has been exceeded. In that case, you can use the Business Alert wizard to create a query that compares the credit limit amounts to the current amounts for your customers.

You can use the wizard to set up the schedule for the alert—that is, when, how often, and for how long you want Microsoft Dynamics GP to check whether the conditions you’ve defined exist. You also can specify a list of people to notify when those conditions occur.

You can create an unlimited number of business alerts, combining information from any of the tables in company or system databases. For example, you can compare the outstanding commissions per salesperson from the sales tables to commissions paid in the payroll tables.

Once you have created and enabled a business alert, the conditions will be checked according to the schedule you set up. Whenever the alert condition is found, an email message is sent to the people or groups that you specified or a task is created for the user that you specified.

Alert notifications

You can use any of the notification methods supported by your messaging system with Business Alerts. For example, you can notify alert recipients using any combination of e-mail, fax, and pager messages. You also can create tasks that will be displayed on their home pages and their task list whenever an alert condition is found.

We strongly recommend that you use a MAPI-compliant messaging system, and that you ensure that it is working correctly with Microsoft SQL Server before using Business Alerts.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 227

P A R T 7

Starting the Business Alert wizard

Business Alerts terms

Terms specific to Business Alerts are defined in the following table.

Term

Alert formula

Joining tables

Notification

Recipient

Definition

A SQL query that defines the conditions you want the business alert to test for.

Identifying the columns in two different tables that store the same information. Also referred to as creating table joins.

Informing a person or group of people that the alert conditions have occurred.

A person or group you want to notify when the alert condition occurs.

228 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 37: Business Alerts setup

Use the Business Alert wizard to create a Microsoft SQL Server query that checks your data for the conditions you specify. Next, create the schedule for the query— that is, when, how often, and for how long you want Microsoft Dynamics GP to check whether the conditions you’ve defined exist. You also can specify the list of people to notify when it does.

Before you set up Business Alerts be sure that Microsoft SQL Server Agent is started and that you’ve set up SQL Mail or Database Mail. SQL Server Agent is not available for SQL Server Express. For more information about setting up SQL Mail or Database Mail, refer to SQL Server Books Online. You also can refer to the following Microsoft Knowledge Base article titled “How to configure Microsoft SQL

Server for use with Business Alerts” ( https://mbs.microsoft.com/knowledgebase/

KBDisplay.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;915097 ).

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

•

Defining a business alert

•

Selecting and joining tables for alerts

•

Rules for Business Alerts formulas

•

Defining an alert formula

•

Setting up an alert notification

•

Scheduling an alert

•

Using data from integrating applications in alerts

Starting the Business Alert wizard

Use the Business Alert wizard to create a business alert. You can create an unlimited number of business alerts, combining information from any of the tables in a company database or in the system database. For example, you can compare the outstanding commissions per salesperson from the sales tables to commissions paid in the payroll tables.

To start the Business Alert wizard:

Open the Business Alert Welcome window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Business Alerts)

Decide if you want to create a new business alert or modify an existing business alert.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 229

P A R T 7

Defining a business alert

• To create a new business alert, mark Create New Alert and choose Next.

Refer to

on page 230 for more information.

• To modify an existing business alert, mark Modify Existing Alert and

choose Next. Refer to

Modifying a business alert

on page 237 for more

information.

Defining a business alert

Use the Define Business Alert window to select the database for a business alert and to assign an ID and description to the alert. You can set up an alert for any company database or for the Microsoft Dynamics GP system database. If you select a company database, the Microsoft Dynamics GP system tables also will be included.

Before you begin this procedure, you should have started the Business Alert wizard. Refer to

Starting the Business Alert wizard on page 229 for more information.

To define a business alert:

In the Business Alert Welcome window, choose Next to open the Define

Business Alert window.

Select the database that will be checked with the alert. The database name is displayed.

Enter an alert ID and brief description of the alert.

To continue setting up the alert, choose Next to open the Select Tables window.

Refer to

Selecting and joining tables for alerts

on page 230 for more information.

Selecting and joining tables for alerts

Use the Select Tables window to select the tables that contain the information you’ll use to define the formula for this business alert.

For more information about the tables Microsoft Dynamics GP uses to store information, use the Table Descriptions window. On the Microsoft Dynamics GP menu, choose Tools >>

Resource Descriptions >> Tables.

If you select more than one table, you must join the tables using the Joining Tables window. For example, suppose you want to create an alert using the RM Customer

MSTR table and the Customer Master Summary table, which both have a Customer

230 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 7 B U S I N E S S A L E R T S S E T U P

Number column. In this case, you could join the Customer Number columns of these tables.

If you’re using an integrating application with Microsoft Dynamics GP and you want to include its information in a business alert, you must select the tables you need to include using the Business Alert Table Maintenance window. For more information, refer to

Using data from integrating applications in alerts

on page 236.

To select and join tables for alerts:

Open the Select Tables window.

(In the Define Business Alert window, choose Next.)

Select the series that includes the tables to include in the alert, then select each table to include and choose Insert. You can include tables from more than one series.

Choose Next; if you’ve selected more than one table, the Joining Tables window will appear.

Select two tables that have columns you want to join. (To select more than one table, hold down the

CTRL

key while selecting.)

Select a column from each table and choose Insert. The columns you select must have the same data type, that is, they must store the same type of information.

For example, you could not join a date column with a currency amount column.

You can create multiple table joins, including multiple table joins between the same tables.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 231

P A R T 7

Defining an alert formula

Each table must be joined to at least one other table before you can continue setting up an alert.

Choose Next and refer to

on page 232 to continue

setting up this alert.

Rules for Business Alerts formulas

Formulas for Business Alerts must adhere to the following rules:

• String constants must be enclosed in single quotes.

• The total number of left parentheses must equal the total number of right parentheses.

• An OR operator can’t precede an aggregate function.

• The formula must include a comparison operator (=,<,>,<=,>=,<>).

• The formula can’t have two operators next to each other.

• The formula can’t have two columns or constants next to each other.

• The formula can’t begin with an operator.

Defining an alert formula

Use the Define Alert Formula window to create the formula that specifies the conditions you want this alert to check for. For example, you can set up a formula to monitor when a customer’s on-order amount exceeds their credit limit.

To define an alert formula:

Open the Define Alert Formula window.

(In the Select Tables window or the Joining Tables window, choose Next.)

Build the formula by adding columns, constants, and operators to the business alert formula.

For example, to create a credit alert that notifies you when customer orders exceed customer credit limits, you might select the Customer Master Summary table, then select the On Order Amount column. Choose Add Column. Choose

232 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 7 B U S I N E S S A L E R T S S E T U P the > button to insert the greater than operator. Then select the RM Customer

MSTR table and the Credit Limit Amount column, and choose Add Column.

When you choose Next, your formula is checked to ensure that it complies with the rules for formulas.

Choose Next and refer to

Setting up an alert notification

on page 233 to continue

setting up an alert.

Setting up an alert notification

Use the Alert Notification window to enter the addresses or user IDs of the people who should be notified when the alert conditions specified in the business alert formula occur. Depending on how you choose to deliver notifications, the addresses might be e-mail addresses, or fax, or pager numbers.

You also can specify whether the recipients should receive a message, or a message and a report. If you choose to send a message and a report, use the Select Report

Columns window and the Select Report Sorting Options window to set up the information to be included in the report.

You can use any of the notification methods supported by your messaging system.

For example, if you’re using Microsoft Exchange, you could notify alert recipients using a combination of e-mail, fax, and pager messages.

We strongly recommend that you use a MAPI-compliant messaging system, and that you ensure that it is working correctly with Microsoft SQL Server before using Business Alerts.

If the recipients are listed by their user IDs, the alert that they receive will be in the form of a new Microsoft Dynamics GP task that is created and assigned to them when the alert conditions that you specify are met.

To set up an alert notification:

Open the Alert Notification window.

(In the Define Alert Formula window, choose Next.)

Indicate if alert recipients will be listed by e-mail addresses or by user IDs. If you mark user ID, skip to step 4.

Indicate if alert recipients should receive a message, or a message and a report.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 233

P A R T 7

10. Choose Next and refer to

Enter the addresses or user IDs of the people or groups to notify when the alert conditions occur. If you entered addresses in the alert recipients list, you should send a test mail message to be sure that all the recipients will receive the message.

• If you have a MAPI-compliant messaging system and you marked E-mail in step 2, you also can choose the To button to open the address window for your system, where you can select addresses. For example, if you’re using

Microsoft Exchange, choosing this button will open the Address Book window, where you can select recipients, as well as carbon-copy (cc) and blind-carbon-copy (bcc) recipients.

• If you marked User ID in step 2, you can choose the To button to open the

Users lookup window, where you can select user IDs.

The list of recipients can’t have more than 255 characters. If you need to create a longer list of recipients, we recommend that you set up and use a mail group, rather than entering each recipient individually.

Enter the message you want the recipients to receive. This message can’t be more than 255 characters.

Choose Next; if you marked the Message and Report option, the Select Report

Columns window will appear.

In the Select Report Columns window, select a table that includes columns you want to appear in the report, then select the columns you want and choose

Insert. You also can change the heading that will appear above each column on the report. If you enter a new column heading, Microsoft Dynamics GP automatically will enclose it in single quotation marks, and replace any spaces with underscore characters.

Columns will appear on the report in the order they appear in the Report

Column list.

234 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 7 B U S I N E S S A L E R T S S E T U P

Choose Next to open the Select Report Sorting Options window.

Select the column for sorting the report and choose Insert. You can insert additional columns into the Report Sort Order list.

Scheduling an alert

on page 235 to continue setting up

this alert.

Scheduling an alert

Use the Schedule Alert window to specify when, how often, and for how long your data will be checked for the business alert conditions you’ve defined.

To schedule an alert:

Open the Schedule Alert window.

(In the Define Alert Output window or the Select Report Sorting Options window, choose Next.)

Decide if your data should be checked for the alert conditions on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. Other options in the window will change, depending on your selection.

Decide if your data should be checked once each interval, or more frequently.

For example, if you chose to have data checked every week on Monday, you could then have it occur every two hours, beginning at 6 a.m. and ending at 6 p.m.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 235

P A R T 7

Modifying a business alert

Enter the date you want the checks of your data to begin and to end. If you don’t want the checks of your data to end, mark the No End Date option.

Mark Keep Alert History to keep a record of dates and times that the alert conditions occurred and the recipients who were notified each time, and mark

Enable Business Alert if you want to start using this alert.

Choose Test Alert to see if the alert formula you entered is valid, and to send a test message to the alert recipients.

Choose Finish to save your changes and close the Business Alert wizard.

Using data from integrating applications in alerts

Use the Business Alert Table Maintenance window to make tables from integrating applications available for business alerts. You must complete the steps in this procedure if you use integrating applications with Microsoft Dynamics GP and you want to include information from these applications in a business alert. After you complete this procedure, you’ll be able to select tables from integrating applications when you’re creating a business alert with the Business Alert wizard.

To use data from integrating applications in alerts:

Open the Business Alert Table Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Utilities >> System >> Business Alerts)

Select the dictionary and series that includes the tables to use in a business alert.

From the list of tables available in the dictionary, select the tables to use and choose Insert.

When you have selected all the tables to use in a business alert, choose Process to add the selected tables to the tables available for business alerts.

236 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 38: Business Alerts maintenance

After you’ve set up and enabled Business Alerts, you might need change an alert by modifying the formula, using different tables, changing the alert schedule, or adding, or removing people from the list of people to be notified when the alert conditions occur.

If you marked the option to keep alert history, you can print a report showing when the alert conditions occurred and which the recipients were notified each time. You also can remove that history if it is no longer needed.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

•

Modifying an alert schedule and notification

•

Making tables unavailable for alerts

•

Printing and removing alert history

Modifying a business alert

Once you’ve created a business alert, you can use the Business Alert Maintenance window to view or modify the details of the alert. You can make changes to virtually any aspect of an alert, such as the alert formula, the list of notification recipients, the alert schedule and the report that is generated by the alert.

To modify a business alert:

Open the Business Alert Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Cards >> System >> Business Alerts)

Enter or select a business alert.

Decide how the business alert needs to be modified. In the Business Alert

Maintenance window, you can change the contents of the alert message, change options for keeping history and enable or disable a business alert.

• To change the alert message, enter new text in the Message field.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 237

P A R T 7

Modifying an alert schedule and notification

• To keep a record of the dates and times that the alert conditions occurred and the recipients who were notified each time, mark Keep Alert History.

• To disable a business alert, clear the Enable Business Alert option.

To change the schedule or the notification options, choose Schedule/

Notification to open the Schedule and Notification window. Refer to

on page 238 for more information.

To change the formula or the tables used in the alert, choose Modify Alert to open the Business Alert wizard. Choose Next one or more times to open the appropriate window for making your change.

• To change the formula, use the Define Alert Formula window. Refer to

Defining an alert formula

on page 232 for more information.

•

To select different tables, use the Select Tables window. Refer to

Selecting and joining tables for alerts

on page 230 for more information.

To print a report showing the history for this alert, choose Print/Remove

History to open the Print/Remove Alert History window. Refer to

Printing and removing alert history

on page 239 for more information.

Save your changes.

Verify your changes with the Business Alert Setup List. To print the list, choose

File >> Print when the Business Alert Maintenance window is open.

Modifying an alert schedule and notification

Use the Schedule and Notification window to modify when, how often, and for how long Microsoft Dynamics GP will check whether the business alert conditions exist. Microsoft Dynamics GP will check your data for the conditions specified in the business alert formula at the intervals you set up here. You also can add or remove e-mail addresses or user IDs from the list of recipients for this business alert.

To modify an alert schedule and notification:

Open the Schedule and Notification window.

(Administration >> Cards >> System >> Business Alerts >> Select an alert >> choose Schedule/Notification)

238 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 8 B U S I N E S S A L E R T S M A I N T E N A N C E

Make the necessary changes to the schedule.

Add or remove recipients.

To disable a business alert, clear the Enable Business Alert option.

Choose Test Alert to ensure that the alert works correctly with the changes you made.

Choose OK to close the Schedule and Notification window.

In the Business Alert Maintenance window, choose Save. Close the window.

Making tables unavailable for alerts

Use the Business Alert Table Maintenance window to make tables unavailable for business alerts.

To make tables unavailable for alerts:

Open the Business Alert Table Maintenance window.

(Administration >> Utilities >> System >> Business Alerts)

Select the dictionary and series that includes the tables you want to make unavailable for business alerts.

From the list of tables available in the dictionary, select the tables to use and choose Insert.

When you have selected all the tables to make unavailable for business alerts, choose Process to remove the selected tables from the tables available for business alerts.

Printing and removing alert history

When you create a business alert, you have the option to have Microsoft Dynamics

GP keep history, which is a record of the dates and times when the alert conditions occurred and the recipients who were notified each time. Use the Print/Remove

Alert History window to print the Business Alert History Report, or remove business alert history and print the Business Alert History Removal Report.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 239

P A R T 7

Chapter 39, “Report deployment,” explains how to deploy predefined SQL

To print and remove alert history:

Open the Print/Remove Alert History window.

(Administration >> Cards >> System >> Business Alerts >> Select an alert >> choose Print/Remove History.)

Select the option to print the Business Alert History Report, or to print the

Business Alert History Removal Report and remove history.

Enter the range of dates you want to include in the report or remove from history.

Choose Process to print the report, or to print the report and remove history.

240 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Part 8: Customizing Microsoft

Dynamics GP

You can use this information to locate the setup instructions for additional components that you purchased. You also can use this information to help you extend your system to your exact specifications. The Microsoft Dynamics GP interface makes your system highly customizable.

This part of the documentation contains the following information:

•

Server Reporting Services reports that are included in Microsoft Dynamics GP to a server or to a Microsoft SharePoint library.

•

Chapter 40, “Excel report deployment,”

explains how Excel reports and Office

Data Connection (ODC) technology work together and how to deploy the reports.

•

Chapter 41, “Sorting options,” explains how to tailor specific elements in the

Microsoft Dynamics GP user interface to your specific needs.

•

Chapter 42, “Word templates,” explains how you can set up and use the

Microsoft Word templates for Microsoft Dynamics GP functionality.

•

Chapter 43, “Extending system functionality,”

provides an overview of the tools you can use to customize your reports, user interface, and data integration processes.

242 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 39: Report deployment

This information explains how you can deploy predefined SQL Server Reporting

Services reports that are included in Microsoft Dynamics GP to a server or Microsoft

SharePoint site. If you are using SQL Server 2008 Reporting Services, SQL Server

2008 R2 Reporting Services, or SQL Server 2012 Reporting Services, you also can deploy charts and key performance indicators (KPIs). Once the reports and charts and KPIs are stored on a server or on a Microsoft SharePoint library, users can access them without starting Microsoft Dynamics GP as long as they have the appropriate security access.

Refer to the System User’s Guide (Help >> Contents >> select Using the System) for more information about using SQL Server Reporting Services with Microsoft

Dynamics GP.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Reporting Services reports that you can deploy from Microsoft Dynamics GP

•

Modify the Report Server web.config file

•

Deploying SQL Server Reporting Services reports

Reporting Services reports that you can deploy from

Microsoft Dynamics GP

Microsoft Dynamics GP contains predefined SQL Server Reporting Services reports that you can deploy to a server or a Microsoft SharePoint library. If you are using

SQL Server 2008 Reporting Services, SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services, or SQL

Server 2012 Reporting Services, you also can deploy charts and KPIs. These reports must be deployed before they can be used. When you deploy reports and charts and

KPIs, new files are created in locations that you specify for you to use.

Once the reports and charts and KPIs are deployed, a user can access them even when Microsoft Dynamics GP is not running and as long as that user has access to the location where those reports and charts and KPIs are stored.

It is the system administrator’s responsibility to create secure locations on a server or on a SharePoint library for these reports.

Modify the Report Server web.config file

To deploy the SQL Server Reporting Services reports, you must modify the Report

Server web.config file for the timeout execution and the maximum request length. If you don’t update the Report Server web.config file for the timeout execution, you might receive an error that states that “the operation has timed out.” If you don’t update the Report Server web.config file for the maximum request length, you will receive an error that the deployment has exceeded the maximum request length allowed by the target server.

You must be an administrator to modify the Report Serve rweb.config file.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 243

P A R T 8

C U S T O M I Z I N G M I C R O S O F T D Y N A M I C S G P

To modify the Report Server Web.config file:

Create a backup copy of the web.config file located in the ReportServer folder.

(The ReportServer folder is located in C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL

Server\MSSQLSERVER\Reporting Services\ReportServer where Reporting

Services is installed.)

Open the Report Server web.config file using a text editor, such as Notepad.

Search for <httpRuntime executionTimeout="9000" />.

In that line, change executionTimeout=”9000” to executionTimeout=”19000” and add the value maxRequestLength="20960".

(<httpRuntime executionTimeout="19000" maxRequestLength="20960"/>

Save and close the Report Server web.config file.

Deploying SQL Server Reporting Services reports

Use the Reporting Tools Setup window to deploy the predefined SQL Server

Reporting Services reports that are available in Microsoft Dynamics GP to the

Report Server or to a Microsoft SharePoint library. You also can use the Reporting

Tools Setup window to redeploy reports or deploy reports to a different location. If you are using Reporting Services 2008, Reporting Services 2008 R2, or SQL Server

2012 Reporting Services, you also can deploy charts and KPIs. If you are using more than one instance of Microsoft Dynamics GP, you should only deploy reports to the report server for one instance at a time.

The Deployment Options list has a tree view that displays the deployment status of each company and of each report type. You can select to deploy reports by company and by report type.

There are three levels in the tree view. You can choose the + symbol next to a level to view additional levels in the tree view. You can collapse and expand the entire tree or just portions of it. A check mark next to a level means that the reports are available to deploy. All items that are not fully deployed will automatically be marked.

244 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 3 9 R E P O R T D E P L O Y M E N T

To deploy SQL Server Reporting Services reports:

Open the Reporting Tools Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Reporting Tools Setup)

On the SQL Reporting Services tab, select the report server mode.

Microsoft Dynamics CRM 2011 or later supports only the native mode of deployment of

Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services.

Depending on your report server mode, enter the following locations. Be sure that your location doesn’t end with a slash.

Native mode location:

Location

Report Server URL

Report Manager URL

Example

http://<servername>/ReportServer http://<servername>/Reports

SharePoint Integrated mode location:

SharePoint Integrated

Location Example

SharePoint Site

Report Library http://<servername>/SharePoint site

ReportsLibrary

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 245

P A R T 8

C U S T O M I Z I N G M I C R O S O F T D Y N A M I C S G P

If you selected Native as the report server mode, you can enter the name of the folder to deploy the reports to. By using a folder, you can deploy Reporting

Services reports for multiple Microsoft Dynamics GP instances to a single

Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Server. The default folder name is the name of the system database. If DYNAMICS is the system database name, the Folder

Name field is blank. After deploying reports to the folder, you must provide access to the folder.

If you are using Microsoft Dynamics CRM 2011, enter the URL for the CRM service, the name of the organization, and specify credentials for the data source.

We recommend that you use Windows Authentication (Integrated Security). If you select to be prompted for credentials, you must mark the Use as Windows credentials when connecting to the data source option on the data source deployed.

You must be using SQL Server 2008 R2 or 2012 Reporting Services and Microsoft

Dynamics CRM 2011 or later to deploy SQL Server Reporting Services reports and metrics that includes CRM data. Microsoft Dynamics CRM supports only the native mode of deployment of SQL Server Reporting Services.

To verify your locations, choose the Refresh button in the upper right hand corner of the Deployment Options tree view.

In the Deployment Options tree view, all items that are not fully deployed are automatically marked.

To exclude an item, unmark the check box. For example, if you don’t want to deploy SQL Server Reporting Services reports in Fabrikam, Inc., expand the

Company level in the tree view and unmark SRS Reports.

Choose Deploy Reports to deploy reports. To redeploy reports for all companies, mark Redeploy all reports for selected companies and then choose

Deploy Reports.

The Business Intelligence Deployment Progress window appears. This window displays the report deployment progress.

If you don’t have the appropriate permissions to deploy reports, a window opens where you can enter a domain\user name and the password you use to log in to Microsoft Windows.

After the reports are deployed, choose Print Status Report to view the deployment status of reports.

246 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 40: Excel report deployment

Microsoft Dynamics GP comes with many predefined Excel reports, which contain the same information as the default SmartList favorites. Excel reports use Office

Data Connection (ODC) technology to maintain a direct link to the underlying company database, so that users with appropriate security access can view real-time data in an Excel worksheet, without needing to start Microsoft Dynamics GP.

This information explains how Excel reports and ODC work together, and how to make the Excel reports available for users to view.

•

Understanding data connections and Excel reports

•

Deploying Excel reports

Understanding data connections and Excel reports

Microsoft Dynamics GP and Microsoft Office provide an integration method, called an Office Data Connection (ODC), that allows you to view live Microsoft Dynamics

GP data in an Excel worksheet.

ODC provides a link to a system or company database in SQL Server. The ODC connection ensures that when the Excel report is viewed, it contains the most recent data.

Each ODC file supplied with Microsoft Dynamics GP corresponds to a default

SmartList object. For example, an ODC file named

TWO_Accounts_AccountSummary.odc links to the same data as the Account

Summary SmartList object.

For each ODC file there is a corresponding worksheet. The Excel report connects to the ODC file to display data. For example, the Excel report named

Accounts_AccountSummary.xlsx displays the data from the ODC file named

TWO_Accounts_AccountSummary.odc.

Before users can view Excel reports, a system administrator must perform a process called “deployment” to create the ODC files and corresponding Excel worksheets, and make them available for users to access. There are two ways deploy Excel reports:

• To a shared folder on a secure server location

• To a SharePoint document library

To view the reports, users must meet the following requirements.

• To view the data that is displayed in an ODC file, users must have the appropriate SQL Server access rights. Refer to

Setting up security for viewing data connections and Microsoft Excel reports

on page 43 for more information.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 247

P A R T 8

C U S T O M I Z I N G M I C R O S O F T D Y N A M I C S G P

• To open the .xlsx worksheet files, users must have the 2010 Microsoft Office system.

• Additional user permissions are required for the shared network folder or

SharePoint Server document library, depending on where you choose to deploy the reports.

As part of the deployment process, the system administrator can designate a location where each user can store any Excel reports and data connections they modify or create. This allows each user to customize reports individually, without affecting the reports and data connections available to all users at the system level.

Once the deployment process is complete, both system-level and user-level Excel reports and their corresponding data connections appear automatically in reports lists within Microsoft Dynamics GP.

To view Excel reports and data connections for a particular series, choose the appropriate series button in the navigation pane, then choose the Excel Reports shortcut. To view Excel reports for all series, choose Administration in the navigation pane, then choose the Excel Reports shortcut. See the System User’s

Guide (Help >> Contents >> select Using the System) for more information about report lists.

Deploying Excel reports

Use the Reporting Tools Setup window to deploy Excel reports and data connections to a shared network location or to a Microsoft SharePoint site. During this process, ODC files are created and saved to the designated location. Excel reports and data connections that are stored in the locations that you specify in the

Reporting Tools Setup window also will be listed in Excel Reports lists. See the

System User’s Guide (Help >> Contents >> select Using the System) for more information about report lists.

The Deployment Options list has a tree view that displays the deployment status of each company and of each report type. You can use the tree view to deploy reports by company and by report type.

You can choose the + symbol next to a level to view additional levels in the tree view. You can collapse and expand the entire tree or just portions of it. A check mark next to a level means that the reports are available to deploy. All items that are not fully deployed will automatically be marked.

To deploy Excel reports:

Decide if you are going to deploy reports to a network share or to a Microsoft

SharePoint site.

If you are deploying reports to a new network share, create a shared folder to store the Excel report file sin a secure network location. Set the share permissions to Change (the minimum) or Full Control. You can use the same folder as you used to deploy the data connection files, or you can create a separate folder.

If you are deploying reports to a Microsoft SharePoint location, create a document library to store the Excel report files.

248 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 4 0 E X C E L R E P O R T D E P L O Y M E N T

Open the Reporting Tools Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> System >> Reporting Tools Setup)

In the System Level area, select the location to deploy reports to.

You must have access to the server to deploy reports to a shared network location.

If you are using Microsoft Office 365 and want to deploy Excel reports to a reports library in SharePoint Online 2010, mark Using SharePoint Online option. This option is available if you selected SharePoint as the location to deploy reports to.

Depending on the location you selected, enter the following information. Be sure to use back slashes when you are entering the location for Excel reports even if you are using a UNC path. You should also be sure that the location doesn’t end in a slash.

Network Share location:

Location

Report Server URL

Example

\\<servername>\Reports

SharePoint location:

SharePoint Integrated

Location Example

SharePoint Site http:\\<servername>\SharePoint site

Data Connections Library DataConnections

Report Library ReportsLibrary

In the User Level area, enter the location to where Excel reports are stored on each user’s computer. You must use the “%” character as the variable for the

Windows user ID in the path.

For example: C:\Documents and Settings\%\My Documents\My Data

Sources\GP Connections

Data connections that are stored in this location also will be listed in report lists.

To verify your locations, choose the Refresh button in the upper right hand corner of the Deployment Options tree view.

In the Deployment Options tree view, all items that are not fully deployed are automatically marked.

To exclude an item, unmark the check box. For example, if you don’t want to deploy Excel reports in Fabrikam, Inc., expand the Company level in the tree view and unmark Excel Reports.

10. Choose Deploy Reports to deploy reports. To redeploy reports for all companies, mark Redeploy all reports for selected companies and then choose

Deploy Reports.

The Business Intelligence Deployment Progress window appears. This window displays the report deployment progress.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 249

P A R T 8

C U S T O M I Z I N G M I C R O S O F T D Y N A M I C S G P

If you don’t have the appropriate permissions to deploy reports, a window opens where you can enter a domain\user name and the password you use to log in to Microsoft Windows.

11. After the reports are deployed, choose Print Status Report to view the deployment status of reports.

250 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 41: Sorting options

Use this information to tailor specific elements in the Microsoft Dynamics GP user interface to your specific needs, enabling you to work more efficiently and spend less time moving from one task to another. This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Setting up custom sorting options for an advanced lookup window

•

Adding new custom links

•

Modifying custom links

•

Copying custom links

Setting up custom sorting options for an advanced lookup window

Use the Advanced Lookups Setup window to set up custom sorting options to be used in addition to the default sorting options that are provided. For example, if you want to sort the Customers list by phone number or postal code, you could set up a custom sorting option to do so.

If you make custom sorting option changes for one company, those changes won’t be applied to your other companies. Custom sorting options can be set on a percompany basis.

To set up custom sorting options for an advanced lookup window:

Open the Advanced Lookups Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Advanced Lookups)

Select the advanced lookup to which you want to create a custom sorting option.

Select the field you want to sort by. The fields that appear in the list will change depending on which object is selected.

Enter a description for the sorting option, or accept the default description. The description will appear in the View >> Additional Sorts menu in the corresponding lookup window.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set up additional options for the selected object.

Choose Save to save the sorting options and synchronize the Advanced Lookup indexes.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 251

P A R T 8

C U S T O M I Z I N G M I C R O S O F T D Y N A M I C S G P

Adding new custom links

Use the Customer Link Setup window and the Create/Modify Custom Link window to create custom links to launch Microsoft Outlook to address an e-mail message, to launch Internet Explorer to view a web page, or to open a document in

Word, Excel, or some other application for customers, vendors, items, salespeople, and employees.

Tracking Number links can be created based on the shipping method for a document, linking to tracking information on the shipper’s web site. Currencyspecific links can be created based on the currency selected, linking to a web site with exchange rate information. Checkbook and credit card links can be created based on the checkbook selected, linking to the bank’s online banking web page.

You can also choose to link to the same location for all values. For example, all checkbooks could be made to link to the same online banking web page.

To add new custom links for currencies, exchange rates, tracking numbers, checkbooks, and credit cards:

Open the Custom Link Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Custom Link)

Choose New to open the Create/Modify Custom Link window.

Select the prompt for which you can create a custom link.

Enter the description of the link.

Enter or select a field value.

252 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 4 1 S O R T I N G O P T I O N S

If the All field values field is available, you can mark this field to attach the link to all the fields using the same field value. For example, you decided to create a link for Exchange Rate. By marking All Field Values, you can click the link for any Exchange Rate prompt for any currency and open the same web site defined for exchange rates.

Enter the internet address of the link you want to create.

Choose Save. When you save the link, information about the link will appear in the Custom Link Setup window.

To add new custom links for customers, vendors, items, salespeople, and employees:

Open the Custom Link Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Custom Link)

Choose New to open the Create/Modify Custom Link window.

Select the prompt for which you can create a custom link.

Enter the description of the link.

Select an address type. The types of addresses available depend on the prompt you selected. For example, if you selected Customer, you could select the primary, ship to, bill to, or statement to addresses. An address type isn’t available for items or sales people.

Select an address field. This information is defined in the Internet Information window. You must define the custom link information in the Internet

Information window for the link to work.

Choose Save. When you save the link, information about the link will appear in the Custom Link Setup window.

Modifying custom links

Use the Custom Link Setup window to modify custom links.

To modify custom links:

Open the Custom Link Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Custom Link)

Select the custom link you want to change and choose Modify to open the

Create/Modify Custom Link window.

In the Create/Modify Custom Link window, enter the modify the information.

Choose Save.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 253

P A R T 8

C U S T O M I Z I N G M I C R O S O F T D Y N A M I C S G P

Copying custom links

Use the Custom Link Setup window to copy custom links. You may want to copy a link if you want to create a new link that uses the same information.

To copy custom links:

Open the Custom Link Setup window.

(Administration >> Setup >> Company >> Custom Link)

Select a customer link and choose Copy to open the Create/Modify Custom

Link window.

In the Create/Modify Custom Link window, make any changes to the link that you want.

Choose Save. If you didn’t change the custom link label for the new link, Copy1 will be added to the label.

254 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 42: Word templates

You can use the Word template functionality in Microsoft Dynamics GP to use predefined templates or create your own.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Word template overview

•

Word templates prerequisites

•

Predefined Word templates for Microsoft Dynamics GP

•

Configuring Word templates

•

Assign a company image to Word templates

•

Installing the Microsoft Dynamics GP Add-in for Microsoft Word

Word template overview

Predefined Word templates for document types such as sales quotes and purchase orders are provided for you with Microsoft Dynamics GP. The templates are based on standard reports in Microsoft Dynamics GP. By default, the Word templates functionality is enabled for Microsoft Dynamics GP. You can print the predefined

Word templates for your customers and vendors in each of the companies you have

access to. For a list of the predefined templates, see

Predefined Word templates for

Microsoft Dynamics GP

on page 256.

You also can create your own template or create a template from an existing template. For example, you might want to change the font size for a template or create separate templates for your customers in the United States and in Canada based on a standard report because of regulatory requirements. The Word template must be based on a standard report.

After creating or modifying a template, you can assign the template to your companies and then to customers or vendors. You can assign a specific template to an individual customer or vendor or a class of customers or vendors. For example, you can create a specific template for a promotion and assign that template to your local customers for that promotional period.

Word templates prerequisites

The following components are required to modify Word templates for Microsoft

Dynamics GP.

• Microsoft Word 2010 or later to make layout changes such changing the font size

• Microsoft Dynamics GP Add-in for Microsoft Word to add fields and data sources to the template

• Visual Studio Tools for Office Runtime 2.0 or later—Visual Studio Tools for

Office Runtime 3.0 is installed with Microsoft Dynamics GP Add-in for

Microsoft Word

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 255

P A R T 8 C U S T O M I Z I N G M I C R O S O F T D Y N A M I C S G P

Predefined Word templates for Microsoft Dynamics

GP

The following predefined Word templates are installed with Microsoft Dynamics

GP. Predefined templates cannot be modified or removed. You can make copies of the predefined templates and make your changes such as changing the font.

Predefined templates do not have logos assigned to them.

You can print the predefined Word templates for your customers and vendors in each of the companies you have access to. If you don’t want use a predefined template, remove the assignment to the company and select a new default Word template.

Document type Report Writer report name

Sales Order Processing Quote

Sales Order Processing Order

Sales Order Processing Invoice

Sales Order Processing Packing Slip

Sales Order Processing Return

SOP Blank History Options Quote Form

SOP Blank History Quote Form

SOP Blank Options Quote Form

SOP Blank Quote Form

SOP Blank History Options Order Form

SOP Blank History Order Form

SOP Blank Options Order Form

SOP Blank Order Form

SOP Blank History Options Invoice Form

SOP Blank History Invoice Form

SOP Blank Options Invoice Form

SOP Blank Invoice Form

SOP Blank Packing Slip Form

SOP Blank Return Form

SOP Blank Options Return Form

SOP Blank History Return Form

Sales Order Processing Back Order

SOP Blank Back Order

Sales Order Processing Picking Ticket SOP Blank Picking Ticket Bin Sequenced

SOP Blank Picking Ticket Order Entered

SOP Blank Options Picking Ticket Form

Receivables Statement Form

SOP Blank History Options Return

SOP Blank History Options Back Order

SOP Blank History Back Order

SOP Blank Options Back Order

Receivables Sales/Invoices

Receivables Debit Memos

Receivables Finance Charges

Receivables Service/Repairs

Receivables Warranties

Receivables Credit Memo

Receivables Returns

RM Statement on Blank Paper

MC Statement Blank Form

RM Blank Document

Predefined Word template name

SOP Blank History Options Quote Form Template*

SOP Blank History Quote Form Template*

SOP Blank Options Quote Form Template*

SOP Blank Quote Form Template*

SOP Blank History Options Order Form Template*

SOP Blank History Order Form Template*

SOP Blank Options Order Form Template*

SOP Blank Order Form Template*

SOP Blank History Options Invoice Form Template*

SOP Blank History Invoice Form Template*

SOP Blank Options Invoice Form Template*

SOP Blank Invoice Form Template*

SOP Blank Packing Slip Form Template*

SOP Blank Return Form Template*

SOP Blank Options Return Form Template*

SOP Blank History Return Form Template*

SOP Blank History Options Return Form Template*

SOP Blank History Options Back Order Template*

SOP Blank History Back Order Template*

SOP Blank Options Back Order Template*

SOP Blank Back Order Template*

SOP Blank Picking Ticket Bin Sequenced Template*

SOP Blank Picking Ticket Order Entered Template*

SOP Blank Options Picking Ticket Form Template*

RM Statement on Blank Paper Template*

MC Statement Blank Form Template*

RM Blank Document Template*

256 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 4 2 W O R D T E M P L A T E S

Document type

Purchase Order

Payable Invoices

Payable Finance Charges

Payable Miscellaneous Charges

Payable Credit Memo

Payable Returns

Payable Check Remittance

Report Writer report name

POP Purchase Order Blank Form

POP History Purchase Order Blank Form

POP Purchase Order Rollup Blank Form

POP History Purchase Order Rollup Blank

Form

PM Blank Document

Check Remittance

Predefined Word template name

POP Purchase Order Blank Form Template*

POP History Purchase Order Blank Form Template*

POP Purchase Order Rollup Blank Form Template*

POP History Purchase Order Rollup Blank Form*

PM Blank Document Template*

Check Remittance Template*

Configuring Word templates

You can use the Template Configuration Manager window to configure Word templates for Microsoft Dynamics GP. By default, the Word templates functionality is enabled for all companies. If you don’t want to use the Word template functionality, you can use this window to disable Word templates.

The Template Configuration Manager window has a tree view that you can use to select the companies, series, and Word templates you want to use.

To configure Word templates:

Open the Template Configuration Manager window.

(Administration >> Reports >> Template Configuration)

Expand to the levels you want to exclude or include, and unmark or mark the companies, series, or Word templates. A check mark next to a level means that the templates available for that level will be made available for use. To exclude a level, unmark the check box.

For example, if you don’t want to use the POP Purchase Order Blank Form

Template* in Fabrikam, Inc., expand to the Word template level in the tree view and unmark the template.

Choose Save in the Template Configuration Manager window to save your changes.

Assign a company image to Word templates

Use the Image Assignment window to assign an image (company logo) for each company that has the Word templates functionality enabled in the Template

Configuration Manager window. Each company can have only one image assigned to it. You also can remove an image from a company.

The image you assign to a company can be from one of the following formats.

Graphics Interchange Format (GIF)

Tagged Image File Format (TIFF)

Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG)

Windows bitmap (BMP)

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 257

P A R T 8 C U S T O M I Z I N G M I C R O S O F T D Y N A M I C S G P

You should keep in mind that the format and resolution of the image you chose may affect the maximum file size when attaching documents for your customers and vendors if you are using the Microsoft Dynamics GP e-mail functionality. The image also affects the size of the reports and documents generated by the Word template functionality. This can affect performance of the printing process.

To assign a company image to Word templates:

Open the Image Assignment window.

(Administration >> Reports >> Template Configuration >> Images)

Select a company in the Company images list.

Click the Add button to open the Select an image window.

Select an image and choose the Open button to assign image to the company for

Word templates.

Choose OK in the Image Assignment window to save your changes.

Installing the Microsoft Dynamics GP Add-in for

Microsoft Word

You must install the Microsoft Dynamics GP Add-in for Microsoft Word only if you want to create new Word templates. The Microsoft Dynamics GP Add-in for

Microsoft Word is used when creating the layout of the Word template document for a report. You also need to install the Microsoft Dynamics GP Add-in for

Microsoft Word when you want add data sources and fields to existing Word templates.

To install the Microsoft Dynamics GP Add-in for Microsoft

Word:

From the Microsoft Dynamics GP 2010 installation media, double-click the

Setup.exe file to open the Microsoft Dynamics GP installation window.

Click Microsoft Dynamics GP Add-in for Microsoft Word under Additional

Products, and then select Install.

If you haven’t installed Visual Studio Tools for Office Runtime, the Software

Update Visual Studio Tools for the Office system 3.0 Runtime wizard appears.

258 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 4 2 W O R D T E M P L A T E S

Follow the instructions in the window to accept the software license agreement.

To install Visual Studio Tools for the Office system 3.0 Runtime, you must accept this agreement.

After Visual Studio Tools for Office Runtime is installed, the Microsoft

Dynamics GP Add-in for Microsoft Word wizard appears.

Follow the instructions in the window to accept the software license agreement.

To install Microsoft Dynamics GP Add-in for Microsoft Word, you must accept this agreement and click Next.

Specify the folder where you want the predefined Word templates installed.

The default folder is C:\Program Files\Microsoft Dynamics\Report Templates.

To select a different folder, click Browse.

Click Install.

Click Finish after the installation is complete.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 259

260 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Chapter 43: Extending system functionality

Use this information as your guide to identifying the types of customization that best fit your needs.

This information is divided into the following sections:

•

Importing and exporting data

•

Customizing documents and reports

•

Customizing the Microsoft Dynamics GP interface

•

Customizing the functionality of Microsoft Dynamics GP

Importing and exporting data

Miscrosoft Business Solutions provides several tools to simplify the process of importing and exporting data.

Integration Manager

Use Integration Manager to set up integrations which can be used on an ongoing basis to import data into Microsoft Dynamics GP tables. For example, you may want to use an integration to import sales transactions from another data collection system. See the Integration Manager documentation for more information.

eConnect

eConnect is a set of development utilities and application programming interfaces (APIs) that integrate outside data sources with Microsoft

Dynamics GP back office components. Use eConnect for high-volume, real time integrations from such external data sources as Web services, CRM applications,

Web storefronts, and legacy applications.

Excel-based budgeting

Use General Ledger to export budgets to Excel, manipulate them, and import them back into Microsoft Dynamics GP. See the

General Ledger documentation for information about using Excel to create and modify budgets.

SmartList

Use SmartList to easily export data to Excel, Word, or other file formats. See the System User’s Guide for information about SmartList.

In addition to the tools available from Microsoft Dynamics, you can use ODBC to use other tools such as Microsoft Access to import or export data. It’s important to understand the

Microsoft Dynamics GP data structure. If you import data incorrectly, you can damage your data. Use the Microsoft Dynamics GP Software Development Kit (installed from the installation media) and the Resource Descriptions windows (Microsoft Dynamics GP

Tools >> Resource Descriptions) to find this information.

Customizing documents and reports

As you begin using Microsoft Dynamics GP, you may find that you want to modify the format of your checks, invoices, sales documents, purchase orders, or other documents. You also may want to customize some reports provided with the system, or create new ones. Microsoft Dynamics offers the following reporting tools.

Report Writer

Use Report Writer to modify the default documents and reports that are provided with Microsoft Dynamics GP. Refer to your Report Writer documentation for more information.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 261

P A R T 8

C U S T O M I Z I N G M I C R O S O F T D Y N A M I C S G P

Advanced Financial Analysis

Use Advanced Financial Analysis to modify the default financial statements that are provided with Microsoft Dynamics GP. Refer to the Advanced Financial Analysis documentation for more information.

Management Reporter for Microsoft Dynamics ERP

You can use

Management Reporter to create customized financial statements. Refer to the

Management Reporter documentation for more information.

SmartList

Use SmartList to create simple reports. SmartList’s report formatting capabilities are limited, but since you don’t need to link tables or set up table relationships, it’s easier to use than other reporting tools. Refer to the System User’s

Guide (Help >> Contents >> select Using the System) for more information.

Customizing the Microsoft Dynamics GP interface

Microsoft Dynamics GP provides numerous tools you can use to tailor the user interface to the way your organization works.

User Preferences

Each person who uses Microsoft Dynamics GP can use the

User Preferences window to control the appearance and behavior of certain aspects of the user interface, including display colors, whether the tab or enter key is used to move to the next field in a window, and default entries for several parts of the system. See the System User’s Guide (Help >> Contents >> select Using the System) for more information about user preferences.

Shortcut Bar

Each person who uses Microsoft Dynamics GP can set up and use shortcuts to streamline access to windows, macros and other frequently used applications. See your System User’s Guide (Help >> Contents >> select Using the

System) for more information about shortcut bar changes that can be made for each user.

Use user-class shortcuts to customize a portion of the shortcut bar for each user

class in your organization. See Part 2, User setup , for information about changes

that apply to user classes.

Modifier

Use the Modifier to move fields, change text, or adjust the order in which the

TAB

ENTER

key advances through the fields in the window. See the

Modifier documentation for more information.

Visual Basic for Applications (VBA)

Use VBA to create new forms or to set default values for specific fields in windows. See the Microsoft Dynamics GP VBA

Developer’s Guide for more information.

Customizing the functionality of Microsoft Dynamics

GP

Microsoft Dynamics GP provides several ways to add custom functionality that’s not available within Microsoft Dynamics GP or through products developed by

Microsoft Dynamics GP Developers.

262 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

C H A P T E R 4 3 E X T E N D I N G S Y S T E M F U N C T I O N A L I T Y

Microsoft Dexterity

Use Microsoft Dexterity to add custom functionality with the same tool used to create Microsoft Dynamics GP. See the Microsoft Dexterity documentation for more information.

Continuum API

Use the Continuum application programming interface (API) to create integrations for Microsoft Dynamics GP. See the Continuum API Guide for more information.

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 263

264 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

Index

A

account access

user classes 211

users 213

account aliases, described 76

Account Definition Setup List, printing 72

Account Format Setup List, printing 74

Account Format Setup window, displaying 73

account formats

account framework 71

adding segments 72 blank spaces 72 copying 72 default 72 designing 72

display widths 73

lengthening 71 limitations 71

main segment ID 74

multidimensional analysis codes 73

printing a list of 74 separating segments 74

setting up 73

account framework

described 71

maximum account length 72

Account Maintenance window, displaying

73, 79, 219

Account Master Table, shortening account segments 71

Account Master table group, checking links 74

account ranges

changing assignments 217

entity assignment 216

organizational assignments 215

account security

account access 211

activating 221

effects on General Ledger 222 effects on inquiries 222

effects on intercompany transactions

216

effects on maintenance windows 223

effects on other modules 222

effects on reports and report options

223

effects on transactions 222

account segments

lengthening 71 limitations 71

main segment 74 separating segments 74

account segments (continued)

sites 76

accounts

activating security 221

categories 79

changing assignments in

Organizational Structure 219

charge cards 112

checkbooks 108, 109

currencies 80

default chart of accounts 74

entity assignment in Organizational

Structure 219

format limitations 71 framework 71

level of posting 91

organizational assignments 215, 218

posting in detail 91 posting in summary 91

activation, of a workflow 179

activity tracking

activity types 53

printing reports 55 removing 55 setting up 55

Activity Tracking Report, printing 56

Activity Tracking Setup Report, printing

Activity Tracking Setup window

displaying 55

types of activities to track 53

addresses

company 62

e-mail 68

Internet 68

printing company addresses 63

setting up for banks 106

advanced lookups, customizing sorting options 251

Advanced Lookups Setup window, displaying 251

Alert Notification window, displaying 233

alerts

see also business alerts

defining alert formulas 232 formula rules 232

formulas described 228

joining tables 230

modifying notifications 238 modifying schedules 238

notifications described 227

printing history 239 removing history 239

alerts (continued)

selecting tables 230

setting up notifications 233

alternate/modified forms and reports, setting access 40

approvals

requiring at least one approval 177

specifying when required for a step

184

approvers

final approvers 178

specifying 186 when there are multiple approvers for a step 186

asset accounts

Assignment window, displaying 12

assignments

account ranges 215

accounts 218

changing for users 214

user classes 210

users 212

attachments, document setup options 126

audit trail codes

assigning source document codes to

described 85, 87 journal numbers 87 overview 87 prefixes 87

printing a list of 88 restrictions on changing 88

subsidiary modules 87

tracking 85

transaction origins 86

Audit Trail Codes List, printing 88, 89

Audit Trail Codes Setup window

displaying 88

removing source document codes 87

B

Balance Sheet accounts, setting up 79

bank cards

checkbooks 112

Bank Deposit Worksheet, company location 109

Bank List, printing 107

Bank Maintenance window, displaying

107

banks

addresses 106 branches 106 described 106

printing a list of 107 transit numbers 107

batches

appending to 94

approving for posting 91

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 265

I N D E X

batches (continued)

limiting posting of 91

posting in summary 94

single journal entry per batch 91, 94

beginning balances, posting to General

Ledger 92

budgets, Excel-based budgeting 261

Business Alert History Removal Report, printing 239

Business Alert History Report, printing

239

Business Alert Maintenance window, displaying 237

Business Alert Setup List, printing 238

Business Alert Table Maintenance window, displaying 236

Business Alert Welcome window, displaying 229

Business Alert wizard

described 229 using 229

business alerts

before you set up 229

defining 230

defining alert formulas 232

described 227

disabling 238, 239 keeping history 236, 238

making tables unavailable 239

modifying 237, 238

notification 238 printing a list of 238

printing history reports 239 removing history 239

scheduling 235

selecting and joining alert tables 230

setting up alert notification 233

start using 236

terms 228

using data from integrating applications 236

C

Calculate Terms Discount Before Taxes option, New Zealand 141

calendar

configuring 171 overview 171

calendar years, tax history 155

carriers, shipping methods 97

cash account, checkbooks 108, 109

changes since last release, information about 4

charge cards

default account formats 72

posting accounts 112

chart of accounts

default 74

default entries 60

deleting 80

chart of accounts (continued)

level of posting 79, 91

modifying 75

updating balances 91

Chart of Accounts Report Options window, displaying 75

Chart of Accounts Report window, displaying 75

check cards

checkbooks 112

changing main segment ID 74

check links

currency table 106

Check Links window, displaying 74

check numbers

changing 110

setting up 108

Checkbook List, printing 110

Checkbook Maintenance window, displaying 109

checkbooks

adding custom links 252

bank cards 112

Bank Reconciliation 107

cash account 108, 109

payables options 110 printing a list of 110

reconciling 108, 109

setting up 109

checklist, for setting up the Workflow system 163

checks

duplicate numbers 110 maximum amounts 110 numbers 110

city taxes, United States 139

comma-delimited format, printing reports in 95

companies

access 35

addresses 62

copying setup information 60 creating 60

databases 59

e-mail addresses 68

e-mail setup options 115

Fabrikam, Inc. 59

FTP sites 68

Internet information 66

options 63

printing company access report 35

printing Company Settings List 63

printing Internet information 67

setting up 59

companies (continued)

setting up VAT 143

storage locations 59

switching 62

tracking Intrastat statistics 129

URLs 68

user access 35, 60, 61

company access

new companies 35 printing a report of 35 setting up 35

Company Access Report, printing 35

company addresses, printing a list of 63

Company Addresses Report, printing 63

Company Addresses Setup window, displaying 63

Company E-mail Setup window, displaying 116

Company Login window, displaying 62

company reports

Account Format Setup List 74

Bank List 107

Checkbook List 110

Company Access Report 35

Company Addresses Report 63

Company Settings List 63

Internet Information Report 67

Payment Terms Report 98

Posting Accounts List 75

Company Settings List, printing 63

company setup

account formats 73

additional companies 60

addresses 62

bank records 106

checkbooks 109

company access 35, 61

company options 63

copying information from other companies 60

country codes 129

country of origin codes 134

credit cards 110

default tax schedule 64

Internet information 66

Intrastat tracking 64

loading default chart of accounts 60

merging distributions 64

payment terms 98

payment terms with discounts 100

port codes 133

posting numbers 65

printing information 63

266 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

I N D E X

company setup (continued)

procedure/regime codes 132

region codes 133

reverse charge taxes 65

separate payment distributions 64

shipping methods 97

tax commodity codes 134

tax date 65 tax details 65 tax edits 65 tax rebates 65

terms discount 64

tracking European Union transactions 66

transaction natures 131

transport mode codes 130

user-defined fields 68

Value-added Tax (VAT) returns 66

Company Setup Options window, displaying 129

Company Setup window

activating security 40

calculating taxes 101

displaying 62, 68, 139, 140, 141

setting up company tax schedules 159 company tax schedules, default 159

Copy Email Message window, opening

119

Copy Organizational Structures window, displaying 204

Copy User Security window, opening 29

Country Code Maintenance window, displaying 130

country codes

entering 141

setting up 68, 129

country of origin codes, setting up 134

Country of Origin Maintenance window, displaying 134

Create Company window, displaying 61

Create/Modify Custom Link window, displaying 252

credit accounts, typical balances 79

Credit Card Setup window, displaying

111

credit cards

accepted from customers 112

adding custom links 252

used by company 112 vendors 112

setting up 110

creditors, setting up VAT 144

currencies

adding custom links 252

checking links 106

company access 104

functional 103, 105

reporting 103, 105 sample company 103 setting up 103

Currency Setup window, displaying 104

current installation instructions, accessing on the Web 4 current upgrade information, accessing on the Web 4

Custom Link Setup window, displaying

252

custom links

adding for checkbooks 252 adding for credit cards 252 adding for currencies 252

adding for customers 253 adding for employees 253

adding for exchange rates 252

adding for items 253 adding for salespeople 253

adding for tracking numbers 252

adding for vendors 253

copying 254

modifying 253

Customer Maintenance window, specifying grace periods 99

customers

adding custom links 253

e-mail options for multiple customers

120

D

data

importing and exporting 261

storage locations 59

data connections

deploying 248

described 247

data types, columns 231

databases, creating companies 59

deactivation, of a workflow 179

debit accounts, typical balances 79

debtors, setting up VAT 144

Define Alert Formula window, displaying

232

Define Business Alert window, displaying

230

Define Entity Relationships window, displaying 202, 207

delegates, allowing approvers to delegate tasks 175

delivery shipping type

selecting 98

tax calculations 148

taxes calculations 149

deployment, Excel reports to a shared network location 248

deposit numbers, setting up 108

deposit slips, formatting 107

discounts

amount 100

payment terms 98, 100

percentages 100 types 100

distributions, posting to General Ledger

document attachment

master records 125 overview 125

setup options 126

transaction line items 125 transactions 125

Document Attachment Setup window, displaying 126

documentation

accessing on the Web 4

symbols and conventions 3

documents

copying e-mail message 119

message setup for e-mail 116

due dates

how calculated 171

setting due dates 186

E

e-mail

addresses 68

copying messages 119

list of documents sent in e-mail 113

mailing reports 94

message setup for documents 116

message setup for workflow 167

overview 113

requirements 114

setup checklist 115 setup options for companies 115

setup options for documents in the

Purchasing series 121

setup options for documents in the

Sales series 119

setup options for multiple customers

120

setup options for multiple vendors

122

E-mail Setup window, displaying 117

employees, adding custom links 253

end of month payment terms (EOM), example 98

entities

assigning account ranges 216

199

assigning accounts 219

assigning user classes 211

assigning users 213

deleting from Organizational

Structure 199

described in Organizational Structure

printing a report of 198, 200 renaming in Organizational Structure

200

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 267

I N D E X

equity accounts, setting up 79

escalation, described 179

exchange of goods, mail-order 146

exchange rates, adding custom links 252

exemptions, taxes 139

expense accounts

Fabrikam, Inc., sample company 59

F

Field Level Security window, displaying

field security ID

adding 47

copying 48

modifying 47

Field Security Maintenance window, displaying 48

files, printing to 95

final approvers, described 178

financial statements, categories 79

fiscal periods

modifying 83 names 81, 83 reconciling General Ledger 83

setting up 82

Fiscal Periods Setup window, displaying

folders, assigning shortcuts to 51, 52

formulas

business alerts 228, 232

defining for alerts 232

described 228

rules 232

freight charges

tax calculations 148, 149

GST registration numbers 141

FTP sites, companies 68

functional currency

described 103

specifying 105

G

Goods and Services Tax (GST)

New Zealand 140

overview 137, 139

percent of sale/purchase 155

print on documents 156

registration number 140

taxable tax option 156

zero-rated 139

H

hard disk space, conserving 55, 89

help, displaying 3

Help menu, described 3

historical years

fiscal periods 81 overview 81

history, tax details 155

history in Business Alerts

keeping 236, 238

printing business alerts reports 239 removing business alerts 239

home pages, default content areas 13

HTML file format, printing reports in 95

I

icons, used in manual 3

incoterms codes, setting up 132

Incoterms Maintenance window, displaying 132

input taxes, entering 141

installation instructions, accessing on the

using with business alerts 236

integrating products

adding 38

verifying security settings 40

with Microsoft Dynamics GP 36

intercompany transactions, account security 216

interface, customizing 262

Internet

customizing information 68 customizing labels 68

printing Internet information 67

setting up company Internet information 66

Internet Information Report, printing 67

Internet Information window

customizing 68

displaying 67

Internet User Defined Setup window, displaying 68

Intrastat statistics

country codes 129

country of origin codes 134

described 129

port codes 133

procedure/regime codes 132

region codes 133

setting up 132

tax commodity codes 134

tracking 129

transaction natures 131

transport mode codes 130

invoices, customizing 261

Invoicing Setup Options window, setting up tax schedules 148

item taxes, tax schedules 157

items, adding custom links 253

J

joining tables, described 228

Joining Tables window, displaying 231

journal entries

journals

reprinting 89 setting to print 89

L

levels

198

deleting from Organizational

Structure 199

described in Organizational Structure

labeling organizational levels 198

renaming in Organizational Structure

200

liability accounts

links

adding for checkbooks 252 adding for credit cards 252 adding for currencies 252

adding for customers 253 adding for employees 253

adding for exchange rates 252

adding for items 253 adding for salespeople 253

adding for tracking numbers 252

adding for vendors 253

copying custom links 254

modifying custom links 253

logins, enable automatic log in option 13

lookup window, displaying 4

luxury taxes, United States 139

M

mail-order distributors, tax calculations

146

maintenance windows, effects of account security 223

MAPI-compliant messaging system, using

227, 233

Mass Close Fiscal Periods window, closing fiscal periods 82

Mass Customer E-mail Settings window, displaying 120

Mass Vendor E-mail Settings window, displaying 122

maximum request length, adding to

Report Server web.config file 243

268 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

I N D E X

messages

copying e-mail messages 119

setup for e-mail 116

setup for workflow 167

Messaging Application Programming

Interface (MAPI), mailing reports 94

Microsoft Access, accessing Microsoft

Dynamics GP data 261

Microsoft Dynamics GP, enable automatically logging in to 13

Microsoft Dynamics GP Add-in for

Microsoft Word, installing 258

Microsoft Dynamics GP search, Microsoft

Office SharePoint Server URL 13

Microsoft Excel reports

deploying 248 deploying to a shared network location 248

described 247

viewing in report lists 248

Microsoft Exchange, alert notification 233

Microsoft SQL Server

business alerts 227

queries 229

miscellaneous charges

tax calculations 148, 149

setting up currencies 103

Modifier

customizing windows 262

modules

multicurrency

Multicurrency Access Setup window, displaying 104

Multicurrency Setup logical table, checking links 106

Multicurrency Setup window, displaying

105

multidimensional analysis codes, account format 73

N

navigation, symbols used for 3

Net 30 payment terms, example 98

network security

firewalls 20 wireless networks 20

new features, information about 4

New Zealand

goods and services taxes 140

payment terms 101

payment terms discounts 140

non-inventoried items, tax schedules 157

non-work days, defining 171

not-for-profit organizations, exemptions

notifications

O

ODBC, accessing data 261

Office Data Connection (ODC), described

247

open years, overview 81

operators, in alert formulas 232

Organizational Assignment Details

window, displaying 217, 218

organizational assignments

account ranges 215

accounts 218

changing for users 214

printing a list of 217

user classes 210

users 212

Organizational Assignments Journal, printing 217

organizational levels

defining 197 described 197

printing report of 198, 200

organizational relationships

copying in Organizational Structure

203

201 described in Organizational Structure

201

examples of copying in

Organizational Structure 205

removing in Organizational Structure

deleting 199 deleting entities 199 entities 199, 200

organizational structure

levels 198, 200

Organizational Structure Assignment

window, displaying 211, 219

Organizational Structure Mass

Assignment window, displaying 216

Organizational Structure Setup Report, printing 198, 200

Organizational Structure Setup window, displaying 198, 199, 200

Organizational Tree window, displaying

202, 203

originators, specifying as approvers 176

origins

output taxes, entering 141

P

parent/child relationships, defining in

Organizational Structure 201

Password Maintenance window, displaying 50

passwords

adding 50

for tasks 32

modifying 50

setting system security 34

system 31, 33

task 33 used in Microsoft Dynamics GP 33

user 26, 28

payables checks, options 110

Payables Setup Options window, setting up tax schedules 148

payment terms

default entries 60

described 98 examples 98

New Zealand 101

printing a list of 98

setting up 99

payment terms discounts

calculate terms discount before taxes

141

end of month (EOM) 98

New Zealand 140

Payment Terms Report, printing 98

Payment Terms Setup window, displaying

99, 100

percent of sale/purchase plus taxes,

Provincial Sales Tax (PST) 155

percent of sale/purchase taxes

Goods and Services Tax (GST) 155

Value-added Tax (VAT) 155

performance, reducing processing time 92

Period Consolidation window, effects of account security 223

period-end procedures, closing fiscal periods 82

pickup shipping type

selecting 98

tax calculations 148, 149

port codes, setting up 133

Port Maintenance window, displaying 133

posting

account detail 91 account summary 91

allowing transaction-level 94

audit trail codes 87

by batch date 94 by transaction date 94

detail 93

effects of account security 222

printing a report of settings 96

reconciling General Ledger 92 reducing processing time 92

report options 95

specifying settings 92

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 269

I N D E X

posting (continued)

summary 94

through General Ledger 91, 92, 93

to General Ledger 91, 92, 93

troubleshooting 45

types of 79

posting accounts

assigning default accounts 90

categories 79

charge cards 112

deleting 80

level of posting 79 printing a list of 75, 80, 90

setting up 78

tax details 155

Posting Accounts List, printing 75, 80

Posting Accounts Report, printing 90

Posting Accounts Setup window, displaying 90

posting journals

audit trail codes 85

multicurrency information 94

next numbers 88

printing 91

printing destinations 95

reprinting 89

posting reports

Audit Trail Codes List 89

Posting Accounts Report 90

Posting Settings Report 96

Source Document List 86

Posting Settings Report, printing 96

posting setup

audit trail codes 88

default posting accounts 90

posting report options 95

posting settings 92

printing a list of posting settings 96

reprinting posting journals 89

source document codes 86

Posting Setup window, displaying 93, 95

preferences, setting up system 13

Print/Remove Alert History window, displaying 240

printers, printing to 94

procedure/regime codes, setting up 132

Procedure/Regime Maintenance window, displaying 132

product documentation, accessing on the

Profit and Loss accounts, setting up 79

Provincial Sales Tax (PST)

overview 137

percent of sale/purchase plus taxes

155

print on documents 156

rates 140

Purchase Order Processing Setup Options window, setting up tax schedules 148

purchase orders

company tax schedules 159

e-mail options 121

purchases taxes

calculations 148

default schedules 148

setting up 153

Purchasing E-mail Setup window, displaying 121

Q

Québec Sales Tax (QST), overview 137

R

rate types, currency default 106

receivables documents, e-mail options 119

Receivables Setup Options window, setting up tax schedules 148

recipients, described 228

Reconcile Financial Information window

effects of account security 223

reconciling General Ledger 83 setting up fiscal periods 83

Reconciliation Form, Withholding 151

reconciling

checkbooks 108

General Ledger 83

year-to-date tables 92

region codes, setting up 133

Region Maintenance window, displaying

133

relationships

copying in Organizational Structure

203

201 described in Organizational Structure

201

examples of copying in

Organizational Structure 205

removing in Organizational Structure

Remove Activity Tracking Detail window, displaying 56

report lists, listing Excel reports and data connections 248

Report Server, modify web.config file 243

Report Writer

customizing reports 261

reporting currency

reports

effects of account security 223

reports (continued)

file formats 95

Microsoft Excel reports 247

posting report options 95 printing destinations 95

sending in e-mail 94

troubleshooting 45

reprint posting journals, specifying to reprint 89

required fields, described 4

Resource Description windows, displaying 261

Resource Explorer window, displaying 49

resources, documentation 3

revenue accounts

rules, alert formulas 232

roll down, described 212

S

sales documents

Sales E-mail Setup window, displaying

e-mail options 119

119

Sales Order Processing Setup Options window, setting up tax schedules 148

sales taxes

Canada 139

company tax schedules 159

default schedules 148

Québec Sales Tax (QST) 140

setting up 153

salespeople, adding custom links 253

United States 139

sample company

creating companies 59

currencies 103

Schedule Alert window, displaying 235

Schedule and Notification window, displaying 238

schedules

for business alerts 235

modifying alerts 238

screen, printing to 94

secured accounts, described 222

secured windows, effects of account security 223

security

accounts 221-223

activating 40, 221 alternate/modified forms and reports

company 33

copying for users 60

deleting records 42

effects on transactions 222

individual users 38 integrating products 38, 40

270 S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E

I N D E X

security (continued)

intercompany transactions 216

new companies 38 new users 38

overview 31

printing a list of user security 40

roles 31

rolling down changes 212

system 31, 34 tasks 31

security considerations

client security 20

Microsoft Dynamics GP security 21

network security 19 overview 19 physical security 19

virus protection 21

security modes

disable field 49 disable form 49 disable window 49 hide field 49 lock field 49 password after 49 password before 49 password form 49 password window 49 warning before 49

security reports, User Security Report 40

Security Role Setup window

security roles

security setup

activating user security 40

individual user security 38

system security 34

Security Task Setup window

security tasks

segments, main account segment 74

Select Report Columns window, displaying 234

Select Report Sorting Options window, displaying 235

Select Tables window, displaying 231

setup

overview 9 using the Setup Checklist window 9

Setup Checklist window

displaying 12

Setup Checklist window (continued)

icons 9

Setup Guide, displaying window information 11

setup in Business Alerts

alert notifications 233

business alerts 230

defining alert formulas 232

scheduling business alerts 235

tables for alerts 230

setup in Organizational Structure

account assignments 218

account ranges 215

activating account security 221

assigning user classes 210

copying relationships 203

entities 197 levels 197

relationships 201

user assignments 212

setup lists, Audit Trail Codes List 89

setup task

assigning 11

completing 12

modifying the status 9 setup tasks, statuses 9

shipping methods

default entries 60

described 97 printing a list of 97 setting up 97 shipping type 97, 98

tax calculations 148

Shipping Methods Setup window, displaying 97

shipping types

delivery 149 pickup 149

shortcut bar, customizing 262

shortcuts

assigning shortcuts to a user class folder 51

assigning shortcuts to an existing user class folder 52

User Class folder 51

sites, account segments 76

SmartList

creating reports 262

exporting data 261 software development kit, accessing data

261

sorting options, checkbooks 110

source document codes

assigning to audit trail codes 88

deleting 87

described 85, 86

modifying 87

printing a list of 86 transactions 86 using 86

Source Document List, printing 86

Source Document Setup window, displaying 86 source documents, printing a list of 86

SQL Server Reporting Services reports, deploying 244

subsidiary modules

audit trail codes 87

correcting transactions 93

posting from 91 posting in detail 91 posting in summary 91

symbols, used in manual 3

System Password Setup window, displaying 34

system passwords

setting 34

using 33

system preferences, setting up 13

system requirements, accessing on the

Table Descriptions window, displaying

T

230

table groups, Account Master 74

tables

business alerts terms 228

joining 230 selecting 230

unavailable for business alerts 239

task assignments

creating 11

modifying the status 9

tasks

delegating 189

how due dates are calculated 171

setting a time limit 186

using passwords 32

when overdue 179

Tax Commodity Code Maintenance window, displaying 134 tax commodity codes, setting up 134

Tax Detail Address window, addresses for taxing authority 156

Tax Detail ID Report, printing 156

Tax Detail Maintenance window, displaying 154

tax details

automatically calculating 158

before you enter 145

calculations 146

calendar-year history 155

described 145

maximum and minimum amounts

153

posting accounts 155

printing a list of 156 printing on documents 156

setting up 153, 154

setting up VAT 144

S Y S T E M S E T U P G U I D E 271

I N D E X

tax ID numbers, entering 154

tax reports

Tax Detail ID Report 156

Tax Schedule Report 158

Tax Schedule Maintenance window, displaying 158, 159

Tax Schedule Report, printing 158

tax schedules

all details 158

before you enter 145

calculations 146

company 159 copying 159

default 148

described 145

freight 157 item 157 miscellaneous charges 157 non-inventoried items 157

overview 146

printing a list of 158

purchases 157 sales 157

setting up 158

setting up company defaults 159

setting up VAT 144

using 146

tax setup

default company tax schedules 159

tax details 154

tax schedules 158

taxable taxes, Goods and Services Tax

(GST) 156

taxes

automatically calculating tax details

158

calculations 146-148

calculations for freight and miscellaneous charges 148

city 139

company defaults 159

default schedules 148

exempt 139, 153 exemptions 139

freight charges 149

goods 153

Goods and Services Tax (GST) 139

GST registration number 140

history option 155

input 141

Input Tax Credit 139

Intrastat statistics 141

luxury 139

maximum and minimum taxable 153,

percent of sale/purchase for

Value-added Tax (VAT) 155

taxes (continued)

percent of sale/purchase plus taxes

155 percent of sale/purchase plus taxes for Provincial Sales Tax (PST) 155

provincial 140

purchases 153

qualifiers 155

Québec Sales Tax (QST) 140

rounding 155

sales 153 services 153 setting up 153

shipping types 148

state 139 taxable 139, 156

taxable amounts 153

United Kingdom 141

United States 139

Value-added Taxes (VAT) 141

zero-rated 153

zero-rated supplies 139 taxpayer identification number (TIN), entering 139

text file format, printing reports in 95

third-party products, security 33

tracking numbers, adding custom links

252

Transaction Entry window, editing batches before posting 92

Transaction Nature Maintenance window, displaying 131 transaction natures, setting up 131

transaction origins

audit trail codes 86

described 91

posting journals 89, 91

posting settings 93

transaction rate types, default 106

transaction-level posting, allowing 94

transactions

correcting 93

described 85

effects of account security 222

posting dates 94

posting in detail 93

posting in summary 94 posting individual 94

posting through General Ledger 92 posting to General Ledger 92

single journal entry per transaction

91, 93

source document codes 86

tax calculations 146

tracing 87

Withholding 151

transit numbers, bank 107

transport mode codes, setting up 130

Transport Mode Maintenance window, displaying 131

tree views, defining organizational relationships 202

troubleshooting, security 45

U

United Kingdom taxes, Value-added Tax

(VAT) 141

Unposted Write-offs Distributed to

Withholding field 151

upgrade information, accessing on the